JP2023126416A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably uniformizing the number of balls put out.SOLUTION: By storage means 1231, the number of balls which will pass through a first specific winning port 1000a in a state where an opening/closing plate 1300 is to form a first state can be changed by being associated with the number of balls which passed through the first specific winning port 1000a in a case where the opening/closing plate 1300 formed a first state before that. Therefore, in a series of operation patters where the opening/closing plate 1300 repeatedly forms the first state, a profit to be given to a player can be adjusted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 23

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible, corresponding to each round (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is a risk that there will be a large difference in the number of payouts during the entire jackpot game.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can satisfactorily equalize the number of payouts throughout the entire jackpot game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a gaming area through which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that flows down the gaming area passes, and a ball through which the ball flows down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. a ball entry switching means capable of switching between a first state in which a ball can be guided to the ball entry port and a second state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the ball entry port; a detection means for detecting a ball entering a ball, in the case where the ball entering switching means maintains the first state, the ball passes through the ball entry opening during a period in which the first state was previously formed; A number changing means is provided which can change the number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls that have been entered.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, in which the number changing means includes a storage means in which the balls that have passed through the ball entry opening are stored, and when the balls come out from the storage means, A discharge port through which a ball passes, a discharge switching means that can be switched between a first state in which a ball can pass through the discharge port and a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and a plurality of types of discharge switching means. and an operation mode switching means that can operate in the following operation modes and change the number of balls discharged from the storage means depending on the operation mode of the discharge switching means.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine according to a second aspect, wherein the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining an interval at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the number of payouts can be uniformized well.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed.

According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed favorably by the interval maintaining means.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning device. It is a front view of the first variable prize winning device. 9 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line IX-IX in FIG. 8. FIG. It is a front view of the first variable prize winning device. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. 10. FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line XII-XII in FIG. 10. FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along the line XII-XII in FIG. 10. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning device. It is a back view of the first variable winning device. 16 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning device. It is a back view of the first variable winning device. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 18. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a), and (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a back view of the variable prize winning device. (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21(a), and (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXId-XXId in FIG. 21(c). (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening in the second operation pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable prize winning device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a back view of the first variable winning device. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. FIG. (a) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable prize winning device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27(c). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the fourth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the fifth operation pattern. It is a diagram showing time measurement changes of two specific winning openings. It is a front view of the 1st variable prize-winning device in 3rd Embodiment. 32 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. 31. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the falling state of the ball that has reached the first variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the 1st variable prize winning device. It is a front view of the game board in 4th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the sixth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the eighth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the 1st specific winning a prize opening and a specific area in a 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial rear view of the game board. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along the XLVI-XLVI line in FIG. 45. (a) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable prize winning device. (a) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the eleventh operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the twelfth operation pattern. It is a diagram showing time measurement changes of two specific winning openings. It is a partial front view of the game board in 6th embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the LII-LII line in FIG. 51. (a) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the 13th operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the 14th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate in 7th Embodiment. It is a top view of the first variable winning device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). (a) and (b) are partial sectional views of the first variable prize winning device along a line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 23, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a game ball or pachinko ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls, rails 61, 62, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling a ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable prize winning device 1000, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the inner frame 12 (Fig. (see 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 640, the first variable prize winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails (a region in which prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal ball entrance 67. If the symbol passes, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery held for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If so, the type of jackpot is also determined. In this pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the special symbol's high probability state (also referred to as the special symbol's probability variable state), For example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery that is performed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as the "special symbol 1 lottery", and the special symbol lottery that is performed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is referred to as the "special symbol 1 lottery". The special symbol lottery that is drawn is referred to as "special symbol 2 lottery."

When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning hole 1000a, which is normally closed, remains open until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed, or 10 balls have won). The release action is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls enter the first specific winning hole 1000a, so a larger amount of prize balls than usual are paid out.

There are six types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," "Jackpot C," "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," and "Jackpot C" (Figure 22 reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000 is configured to be changed.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating this will be stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while a variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entries is determined for each type of ball entry port. Each ball is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls in symbol 2 remains, the next special symbol is drawn, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 both remain, a lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is executed preferentially.

In the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640. become easy. In other words, when a normal symbol wins, the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, and as a result, the special symbol is more likely to be drawn.

In addition, when a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the second symbol display device 83 starts to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 while a variable display is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes will be suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls will be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. At the same time as being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal ball entrance 67, the next normal symbol lottery is held, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. will be started.

In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, and the special symbol lottery is After the 100th time, the normal state is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the variable probability state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of drawings of the special symbol. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to shift to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol probability changing). In this case, after a jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c to be described later), the time saving state of the normal symbol is set until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

It should be noted that the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the probability variable state (high probability state) of the above-mentioned special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the above-mentioned normal symbol becomes the time-saving state is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, a state in which the probability is changing (probability changing).In other words, it is a state where the probability of a jackpot is changing (probability changing). This is a gaming state that is easy to transition to. In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability of the special symbol is changing) includes a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of special symbols" refers to a time when the probability of special symbols is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than when the probability of special symbols is changing.

Further, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of normal symbols refers to a state of the game in which the winning probability of the normal symbols increases and it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which neither the probability of special symbols changes nor the time reduction of normal symbols (the state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) has increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the regular symbol, not only the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is changed. A long time is set compared to . When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. That is, it becomes easier to draw special symbols.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. , The number of openings of the electric accessory 640a when a normal symbol hits may be increased compared to the normal state. Also, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the regular symbol, the winning probability of the regular symbol (second symbol) does not change, and the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol ( It may be configured such that only the winning probability of the second symbol) is increased compared to the normal state.

At the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2), there is a first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LEDs") 37a serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize winning) by the lighting state. A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol after the fluctuation is finished, and a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of that special symbol is displayed in a lit state. The number of pending balls, which is the number of balls for which variation has not been performed (pending balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The number of balls is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is held up to a maximum of four times, the maximum number of times that the ball is held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits light in a different color (for example, red, green, blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted light colors, various gaming states (high probability states of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be realized with a small number of LEDs. , normal symbol time saving, etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is shown.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by winning the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays a variable display, and a second symbol is displayed in a variable manner using the passing of a ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED is provided. A center frame 86 is disposed in this variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is configured to display the first symbol while the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the The system is structured so that a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

For example, if the special symbol lottery results are "Jackpot B", "Jackpot C", "Jackpot B", and "Jackpot C", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot A", any number among all the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers A fluctuating display is performed in which the main symbols to which are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

Next, the display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to hit the ball toward the right path (channel) of the game board 13 will be explained.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easier to release when the special symbol is in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state, so the ball moves to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting the ball (hitting to the right), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640. Further, although details will be described later, if a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) that is performed based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first ball entrance 640 Compared to a case where a jackpot is achieved by a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) performed based on the entry of a ball into the hole, a jackpot (jackpot a) that allows the maximum profit to be obtained is more likely to occur. Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols awarded after the end of the jackpot or the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right hit. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the variable probability state or the normal symbol is set to the time-saving state, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 unless the player hits the right ball, so the special The player will not be able to fully benefit from the probability change state of the symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (right hit navigation) in the variable probability state of special symbols or the time saving state of normal symbols, the player can The structure is designed to ensure that the benefits of this will be obtained.

In the right-handed navigation, the text "Aim to the right!!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the text. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to reliably obtain benefits due to the variable probability state of the special symbols and the shortened time state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. This warning image indicates that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not the period in which the player should hit the ball into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (hitting the ball to the right). This is an image (a right-handed warning image) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player is hit. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in a normal state (a state that is neither a special symbol probability changing state nor a normal symbol time saving state).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to release in the normal state (even if the ball is hit to the right, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entry opening 640). For this reason, if the ball is hit right in the normal state, there will be fewer opportunities to receive a special symbol lottery, compared to when the ball is hit to the left and aimed at the first ball entrance 64. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it becomes difficult to hit the jackpot, resulting in a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed hitting warning image and encouraging left-handed hitting, the player is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from making a loss.

If it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the third symbol display device 81 will display the words "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" The characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not play right-handed (he should play left-handed). Furthermore, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed hitting warning screen, the clerk at the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is playing an irregular game method of playing right-handed in the normal state.

Note that a method for determining whether or not the ball is hitting to the right is, for example, if the ball enters the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see Figure 2) into which the ball may enter if the ball is hitting to the right. Judgment is based on whether the ball was hit or not.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball enters the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, the right-handed hit warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state (jackpot state), when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning hole 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being played, and the right It may be configured to display a strike warning image. As a result, the clerk at the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed player warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning hole 1000a in a state other than the special gaming state (jackpot state), a signal indicating that fraud is being committed is sent to the hall computer. It may also be configured to output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that fraud is being committed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraud is being committed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be explained. Here, an example of an abnormality in the first variable winning device 1000 is a case where a ball entering the first specific winning hole 1000a is detected even though it is not in a special gaming state (jackpot state).

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the word "warning" is displayed in large letters in the center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, at the bottom, the words "Please call the gate error staff" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and therefore can quickly request a repair or the like from a parlor clerk or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays an "O" symbol and an " This is a fluctuating display in which the lights are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "○" after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set so that it is shorter when the probability of the special symbol is changing or when the time of the normal symbol is shortened than when the gaming state is in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so it is possible to draw the regular symbol (second symbol) more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, so the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640 in the open state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the player can enter the second ball entrance 640 by other methods, such as increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the special symbol's probability change or the normal symbol's time reduction than during the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will be constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol win may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and is used to prevent balls flowing down the right side of the game board among the balls fired at the game board. is configured so that a part of it can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 mentioned above, and also on the second symbol holding lamp 84. is also lit up. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol between the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. This may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). You may do so. Further, the number of normal ball entry ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, to the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entry switch, the A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entry port 64 when viewed from the front, a second ball entry port 640 through which a ball can enter a prize is provided. When a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, a second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second ball entry switch, the main A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

Further, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 each serve as one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the prize. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 640. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, if the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric The object 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the normal symbol's fluctuation display is also shorter, so the normal symbol's fluctuation The symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed on the display. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, a state can be created in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 compared to the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second ball entrance 640, and is in a state where balls can always be won.

Here, the probability of hitting the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) that yields the maximum profit (ball exit) as the jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is that if the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, is set higher than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win at the second ball entrance 640, so it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. The player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by hitting the first ball entry hole 64, there are many opportunities for a jackpot lottery, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, when the special symbol is changing probability or the normal symbol is shortening the time, by passing the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state. Since the second ball entry port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win, the ball is fired toward the second ball entry port 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"). ), it is more advantageous for the player to let the ball pass through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a, and aim to win the jackpot by hitting the second ball entrance 640. becomes.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entry port 64 (lower left side of the second ball entry port 640), and a first special winning device 1000 that opens in the left-right direction is located approximately in the center of the first variable winning device 1000. A prize opening (large open opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery held due to a winning in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that it becomes a stop symbol for a jackpot. In addition, the occurrence of a jackpot is notified by displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the first specific winning hole 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This first specific winning a prize opening 1000a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the first specific winning a prize opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of gaming value (gaming value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on one ball winning a prize.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300 that forms an open state that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by upward rotation, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening/closing plate 1300. We are prepared. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the event of a jackpot, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the opening/closing plate 1300 upward, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific winning hole 1000a, and distinguishing between the open state and the normal closed state. It operates in such a way that it repeats alternately.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64. Balls flowing down the game area that do not land in any of the ball entry ports 63, 64, 1000a, and 640 are guided through the first out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. do.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing drive on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has an input/output function. Various commands and control signals are sent to these via the port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) consisting of a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable prize winning device 1000 has an inclined surface 1237 provided on its upper surface, so that when the player hits the ball to the right, some of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timer unit 80 enter the second ball entrance 640. Almost all of the balls that flow downstream without forming a ball are guided to the flow path forming section.

FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covered front plate 1200 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covered front plate. 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening and closing plate 1300 through rotation, and the power transmission member. A driving device 1500 that drives the ball 1400, a regulating member 1600 that regulates the discharge of balls in conjunction with the opening/closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are installed on the main body member 1100 from the back side. The rear cover 1700 is fastened and fixed as shown in FIG.

The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 that is recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front toward the back side. The ball flows down through the holding hole 1130 which is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is fitted on the right side of the holding portion 1120 when viewed from the front, and the front side of the thin plate member 1110. A protruding part 1140 that protrudes along the path, an outlet 1150 that discharges the balls from the front to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotating part that protrudes from the back side of the thin plate member 1110 to support the power transmission member 1400. It mainly includes a support part 1160 and a support claw part 1170 that protrudes in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft part 1610 of the regulating member 1600 above the discharge port 1150.

The housing portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is stored, a rectangular recess 1122 recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and A through hole formed in a rectangular shape perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 that operates along the right end of the recess 1122 back and forth in the thin plate member 1110. 1123.

The support recess 1121 is formed to have a width slightly larger than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and in the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening on the back side of the cover front plate 1200 is closed. Ru. That is, the opening/closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the covering front plate 1200.

The rectangular recess 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate part 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and its recess depth is slightly deeper than the plate part 1310. As a result, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a tilted position (closed state), the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122, and the opening/closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

The protruding portion 1140 protrudes to a position where it abuts the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200. The ball flowing down is decelerated by coming into contact with the protrusion 1140. Note that a similar protrusion 1235 is also provided in the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap with the protrusion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

The rotation support part 1160 includes a shaft part 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a shaft part 1161 that protrudes evenly toward the back side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arcuate shape coaxial with the shaft part 1161. It mainly includes a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angular range where it comes into contact with the rotating tip 1421.

The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 on the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in front view to the back side. 1220, an accommodating part 1230 extending in a box shape opening toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall part 1220 in the left-right direction, and a accommodating part 1230 disposed at the upper end of the accommodating part 1230. It mainly includes a detection sensor 1240.

The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 in front view, the left side wall portion of the accommodating portion 1230 in front view, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which the ball flows down in the vertical direction. Department will be formed.

The accommodating portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, has a storage channel 1231 formed inside with a width that allows the ball to flow down, and a middle portion of the storage channel 1231 that protrudes toward the back side. It mainly includes a protrusion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side when viewed from the front.

The storage flow path 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion with a U-shaped cross section that opens on the back side extends while being bent into a U-shaped front side, and when the opening is blocked by the main body member 1100, the ball can pass through. form a flow path. Note that, in this embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed from a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the balls flowing down the storage channel 1231.

The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12), which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the back side at the lowest end, and a rolling surface that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a surface 1231b.

The angle of inclination of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal plane of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 that reaches the rolling surface 1231b.

The protruding portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the protruding portion 1235 protrudes to a position where it can abut the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231, and decelerates the ball by abutting against the ball.

The slope 1237 slopes downward toward the left in front view. Thereby, the ball that has landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled toward the left and guided to the flow path forming section.

The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passing, and the number of winnings is counted.

The opening/closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between rolling the ball toward the detection sensor 1240 and dropping the ball downward without contacting the ball, depending on the attitude, and includes a horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310. , a pair of shaft portions 1320 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the lateral end of the plate portion 1310 , and a pair of shaft portions 1320 extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. It mainly includes a loaded portion 1330 provided therein.

The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls when in the raised position (open state), and the length in the transverse direction is covered when in the raised position (open state) such that the short direction extends along the front-rear direction. The length is such that the distance from the front plate 1200 is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is in close proximity to the detection sensor 1240.

Furthermore, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered to have an arcuate cross-section at the upper corner of the opposite end of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised position (open state).

The plate portion 1310 is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmission portion 1332 extending to the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the intervening transmission portion. It mainly includes an engaging portion 1333 that protrudes from 1332 to the right side in rear view (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

The engaging portion 1333 extends to a position that interferes with the motion locus of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on its upper surface. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a, not the corner portion, comes into contact with the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress can be avoided when the engaging portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 come into contact with each other. .

The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disc-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extending portion 1420 extending from the main body portion 1410 in the axial radial direction.

The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 into which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a protrusion pin 1412 that protrudes from near the outer peripheral portion in parallel to the direction in which the support hole 1411 is formed.

The protruding pin 1412 is a part that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and as the tip member 1520 moves linearly by switching the excitation of the drive device 1500, the protruding pin 1412 is displaced and the power transmission is performed. Member 1400 rotates.

The extending portion 1420 includes a rotary tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, and a pushing portion 1422 protruding from the rotary tip portion 1421 toward the front side. Equipped with

The drive device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves a movable member by switching excitation, and a tip member 1520 that is H-shaped in front view (having a concave portion at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , is mainly provided.

The tip member 1520 has a concave portion on its upper side configured to have a shape capable of accommodating the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, the recess is formed in a shape that allows the protruding pin 1412 to remain housed inside while the power transmission member 1400 rotates (see FIG. 20).

The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 that is pivotally supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extension portion 1620 that extends in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. It mainly includes a ball receiving part 1630 whose surface on the side of the member 1100 is formed at the same level as the extending part 1620 and is thicker than the extending part 1620.

The extending portion 1620 is arranged on the movement locus of the intervening transmitting portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmitting portion 1332 when the opening/closing plate is in the raised position (open state).

The ball receiver 1630 is arranged in such a manner that it overlaps the discharge port 1150 (the ball discharges through the opening of the discharge port 1150) in a tilted posture (a posture in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is placed at the lower position, storage state). It is formed in such a way that it is narrowed to the extent that it is not

Note that the regulating member 1600 is biased by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain the ascending position (a position in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, a discharge state).

The rear cover 1700 includes an outlet 1710 that is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the outlet 1150 passes. The balls discharged from the discharge port 1710 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is shown partially torn.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is placed in the closed state, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the cover The opening/closing plate 1300 can be placed along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without reducing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. The thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 1200 are arranged side by side at an interval that allows a ball to pass through. By guiding the ball between them, it is possible to drop the ball along the flow path forming section.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention part 1331 of the loaded part 1330 moves toward the front side of the main body member 1100 in a manner that partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240. overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and irregular winnings (for example, a ball that hits a nail or the like without being guided by the opening/closing board 1300 may be blown sideways to the detection sensor 1240). 1240) can be prevented.

Although details will be described later, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, so the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which no balls are stored in the storage channel 1231.

The open state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. Note that in FIGS. 10 and 11, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is shown partially torn. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated with imaginary lines in order to understand the size of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 protrudes to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. By doing so, the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is prevented from falling.

The ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 1200 rolls along the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 starts from the right end of the ball. The ball passes through and enters the storage channel 1231.

Note that in the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is left between the plate part 1310 and the covered front plate 1200. Therefore, compared to the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that it comes into contact with the covering front plate 1200, the amount of required material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening/closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by reducing the diameter of the movement locus of the tip of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the transverse direction, interference between the opening/closing plate 1300 and a ball passing in front of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates can be easily avoided. be able to.

Here, although the details will be described later, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state, so the balls are not discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the balls that have passed the detection sensor 1240 enter the storage channel. is stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which balls are stored in the storage channel 1231.

As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of this embodiment is formed with a length that can store a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) as an upper limit. When ten balls are stored in the storage device 1231, the tenth ball stops at a position where it is detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Therefore, the tenth ball acts as a stopper, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh ball attempts to pass through the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, making it difficult for the eleventh ball to enter the detection sensor 1240.

In this embodiment, when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, and the balls remaining on the opening/closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening/closing plate 1300. However, as the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state with the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the balls are not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but remains at a position where it does not completely pass through the detection sensor 1240. do.

When the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but during this switching, the tenth ball is exposed to the accumulated flow while receiving a load from the ball entry prevention section 1331. It is pushed into the inside of the channel 1231 (see FIG. 21(b)). That is, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball remains in a manner blocking the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening/closing plate 1300 is switching to the closed state, the entry prevention portion 1331 stops the tenth ball. This is due to the fact that the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates is different from the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 because it closes the opening of the detection sensor 1240 while contacting (rubbing) the ball. It is possible to prevent the moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened, and it is possible to prevent the 11th ball from passing through the first specific winning hole 1000a.

Therefore, there is no need to set a limit on the period from when the predetermined number of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 until the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening/closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after detection, or the opening/closing operation may be started 1 second after detection. In the present embodiment, the process is performed after waiting until the 10th ball makes contact with the 9th ball (after the center of the ball is placed beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention part 1331 and on the detection sensor 1240 side). ) In order to operate the opening/closing plate 1300, the opening/closing plate 1300 is controlled to open/close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Due to the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 described above, in this embodiment, the number of balls passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to ten while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. Note that in this embodiment, prevention (delay) of ball entry can be performed only for the 11th ball. That is, the first to tenth balls can pass the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state compared to the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in all spheres.

For example, in the case of a structure in which a ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 is decelerated once at the passing position, thereby delaying the winning of subsequent balls, it is easy to suppress the winning of the 11th ball, while the winning of the 11th ball is easily suppressed. Since each of the 10th balls from 1 to 3 is partially connected and decelerates the balls as they roll on the rolling surface 1311, the time it takes for the 10th ball to pass the detection sensor 1240 is There was a problem that the game became long and the game was postponed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the configuration that decelerates the first to tenth balls is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240, so the first to tenth balls are Even if the balls flow down one after the other, they can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at the same speed as they flow down, making it possible to speed up the game.

Furthermore, even if most of the period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state has elapsed due to repairs such as a ball jam, and the game is started towards the end of that period, the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 will be ignored. There's no slowing down, so you can let more pitches in.

Regarding the 11th ball, no matter how fast it flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that allows it to reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening/closing plate 1300 starts its tilting operation), regardless of its speed, , the 11th ball can be physically prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th balls.

With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement of the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIG. 12 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 1000 taken along the line XII-XII in FIG. Note that in FIG. 12, balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated.

Here, the mechanism by which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are arranged in the same manner each time will be explained. First, the ball P1 that first enters the storage channel 1231 in an empty state is guided by the guide surface 1231a that slopes backward at the lowest part of the storage channel 1231, and is placed in a position where it comes into contact with the front of the regulating member 1600. Ru.

The ball P1 is weighted by the subsequently entered ball P2 that reaches the lower end, and settles into the arrangement shown in FIG. 12. The ball P2 has a degree of freedom in placement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the ball P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, depending on how the pachinko machine 10 falls in the front-rear direction when it is placed, it may lean toward the covered front plate 1200 or it may lean toward the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. Note that, as shown in FIG. 12, the protruding portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 1140 abuts the ball P2, so when the protruding portion 1140 is in contact with the ball P1, the ball P2 is in contact with the main body member. It does not come into contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

A weight is applied to the ball P2 when the ball P3, which subsequently enters the ball, reaches a position where it comes into contact with the ball P2. Here, in this embodiment, the protruding part 1235 disposed on the covering front plate 1200 is connected to the protruding part 1235 on the right side of the ball P2, no matter where the ball P2 is located in the front-rear direction. The ball P3 is disposed at a position where it is impossible for the ball P3 to enter between the front cover plate 1200 and come into contact with the thin plate member 1210 of the cover front plate 1200 (a position where the gap between the ball P3 and the ball P2 is kept small).

Therefore, no matter where the ball P2 is located in the front-back direction, the center position of the ball P3 will be placed on the back side of the center position of the ball P2, and the ball P3 will be placed on the back side of the ball P2 (upper side in FIG. 12). ). Therefore, the ball P2 is pushed toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 12) due to the load on the ball P3. As a result, the sphere P2 settles into the arrangement shown in FIG. 12.

Thereafter, the ball P3 receives a load from the subsequently entering ball P4 under almost the same conditions as the conditions under which the ball P2 received the load from the ball P3 (except that the front and back direction is reversed), and the ball P3 settles into the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

That is, the arrangement of the nth ball that entered the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n+1)th ball that entered the storage channel 1231. In addition, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the balls is not fixed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but by maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the ball, and by installing protrusions 1140 at predetermined locations. This is realized by arranging 1235. Thereby, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

As described above, in this embodiment, by arranging the protrusions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the balls are stored in a fixed arrangement every time the action of storing the balls in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, the number of items stored each time can be unified.

With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of balls from the storage channel 1231 will be described. 13(a) and 13(b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XII-XII in FIG. 10. In addition, in FIG. 13(a), the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b, and in FIG. 13(b), the ball P2 is ejected and the ball P3 is in the position of the ball P2 in FIG. The state where it is arranged is shown in the figure.

As will be described later, as the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the opening/closing plate 1300 is brought into the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is put into the discharge state and the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. When ejecting the ball. The ball placed at the lowest end (ball P1 in FIG. 12) is ejected to the back side along the slope of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following ball (ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are ejected one after the other.

Here, since the angle of inclination of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal plane of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231 (channel extending in the left-right direction), the velocity of the ball P1 decreases. is greater than the velocity of the ball P2, so a gap is created between the balls P1 and P2 (see FIG. 13(a)). Therefore, the load applied from ball P2 to ball P1 when ball P1 is ejected can be minimized, so the speed at which ball P1 is ejected is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after ball P1. can be converted into

After the ball P1 is discharged, the following balls P2, P3, and P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the slope of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 come into contact with the protrusions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13(a)). Due to this contact, the balls P3 and P4 are redirected in directions DP3 and DP4 having a longitudinal component, pass through the positions of the leading balls P2 and P3, respectively, and are decelerated.

In other words, by coming into contact with the protrusions 1140 and 1235, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231, and the balls stored earlier are stopped. The vehicle will be relocated to its previous position and decelerated.

This creates a gap between the balls P2 and P3 (see Figure 13(b)), and the load applied from the ball P3 to the ball P2 when the ball P2 is ejected can be minimized. , the speed at which the balls P2 are discharged can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the balls P2.

That is, since the subsequent balls flow down the storage flow path 1231 for a longer distance, the more the number of stored balls increases, the more the subsequent balls are accelerated by gravity, and accordingly, the ejection mode of the ball P2 (the speed at the time of ejection, Although there is a possibility that the ejection interval between the ball P1 and the ball P1 may change, the change in the ejection mode is caused by the effect of the protrusions 1140 and 1235 described above (the ball riding on the rolling surface 1231b and the ball being ejected, and the subsequent ball discharging from the ball P1). This can be suppressed by creating a gap between the ball and the ball to eliminate the load due to gravity.

Thereafter, the subsequent balls repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13(a) to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13(b), thereby discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231. As described above, by creating a gap between the ball that is ejected by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the ejected ball is ejected without being affected by the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the manner in which the balls are discharged (speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) can be made uniform.

In other words, in this embodiment, the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 can equalize the manner in which the balls are ejected (speed during ejection, ejection interval, etc.). In this embodiment, the manner in which the balls are ejected is such that it takes about 0.2 seconds for one ball to be ejected. Therefore, by maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state for 2 seconds or more, all of the maximum number of balls (10) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged.

14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 1000 is a cross-sectional view. Note that in FIGS. 14 to 16, the open/close plate 1300 is shown in a closed state, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-energized state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is positioned above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300. placed at a distance.

Since the intervening transmission section 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the upper side and separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive any load from the intervening transmitting section 1332, and the regulating member 1600 is supported by the torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the ejected state by the biasing force.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention portion 1331 projects in such a manner that the opening size of the detection sensor 1240 is smaller than or equal to the projected area of the ball. This makes it possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XIX-XIX in FIG. 1000 is a cross-sectional view. Note that in FIGS. 17 to 19, the open/close plate 1300 is shown in an open state, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. The engaging part 1333 is pushed into the pushing part 1422.

The interposed transmission section 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates, and in this state, the extending section 1620 of the regulating member 1600 receives a load from the interposed transmitting section 1332, changing the posture of the regulating member 1600. is switched to a tilted posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, a load due to the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and a biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulating member 1600. In this embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring A structure is adopted that can suppress the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when maintaining the opening/closing plate 1300 in an open state while maintaining a large value. The large biasing force of the torsion spring makes it possible to immediately switch the regulating member 1600 to the discharge state, which leads to the effect that the balls can be quickly discharged from the storage channel 1231. The adopted structure will be explained below.

In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, When switched to , the power transmission member 1400 is pushed outward along the rotational axis direction of the motion locus E1. Note that the motion trajectory E1 is illustrated as the outline of the movement trajectory of a portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening/closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not applied to the operating direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400, but to the surface forming the rotation direction. is applied in the axial direction, which is perpendicular to the Therefore, the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 can be prevented from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

That is, the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) that biases the regulating member 1600 is directed in the direction of pushing the opening/closing plate 1300 back toward the closed state, but no matter how large the biasing force is, this biasing force is not the driving force. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

Thereby, once the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state from varying due to the load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continue applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the switching plate 1300 at the maximum value.

That is, after the solenoid 1510 is energized to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the storage state against the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage is reduced. However, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, even if a varying load is applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state without being affected by the load.

An example of the variable load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 is a load applied by the weight of the ball. That is, for example, since the opening/closing plate 1300 is configured such that a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311, it receives a load due to the weight of the ball when the ball lands, and since the number of balls changes frequently, the opening/closing plate 1300 1300 is given a varying load. Further, for example, since a load is applied to the regulating member 1600 from a ball stored in the storage channel 1231, especially a ball disposed at the lowest end of the storage channel 1231, there may be cases where the ball is present or not. A varying load is applied.

Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked, it is not possible to bring the regulating member 1600 into the discharge state while maintaining the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300. Therefore, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it is physically impossible for more balls than can be accumulated in the storage channel 1231 (in this embodiment, 10 or more balls) to pass through the detection sensor 1240. It can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in an open state in an unauthorized manner and the number of prize balls to be won is increased.

20 and 21 illustrate the operations of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. FIG. 20(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20(b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). 20(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21(b) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000. 21(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XXIb-XXIb. It is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 1000 along the line -XXId.

In addition, in FIGS. 20 and 21, for easy understanding, only the opening/closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are maintained in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). The illustration of the other components is omitted, and the state change of the opening/closing plate 1300 from the open state to the closed state is shown in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is de-energized) is shown. , FIG. 20(c) shows a state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and placed at a position away from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1, as shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). ), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and placed at a position away from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2 is shown in FIGS. 21(c) and 21(d). 1520 is displaced and placed at a position separated by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 from the reference line O1 (the final position when the solenoid 1510 is energized).

In addition, in FIG. 21(b), the first specific winning hole 1000a arranged on the near side is illustrated with an imaginary line for reference, and the outline of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as the one used in the illustration is illustrated with an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening/closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21(b) without interfering with the ball.

From the state shown in FIG. 20(a) to the state shown in FIG. 20(c), the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening/closing plate 1300 maintains the same posture. In addition, in FIG. 20(c), the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 are in contact with each other.

This allows momentum to be applied to the power transmission member 1400 before the opening/closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state, so compared to the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 starts rotating at the same time as the power transmitting member 1400 starts rotating. As a result, the driving force required at the start of rotation (initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 20(c) to the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharge state, while the opening/closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and changes between the closed state and the open state. (See FIG. 21(b)).

In the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21(b), when the ball flows down to the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 (the right side in FIG. 21(b)) due to the plate portion 1310 being extended to the front side. , the ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the ball acts in a direction pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21(b)), but power is transmitted by moving the tip member 1520 to the right in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21(a)). Since a load is applied to the engaging portion 1333 in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21(b)) via the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing plate 1310 from rotating due to the weight of the ball.

Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21(b), balls can be prevented from passing downward through the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 while allowing the balls to be discharged from the discharge port 1150. .

This solves the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state during the time required for discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231, and the conflicting problem of shortening the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 (shortening the interval). In the state shown in FIG. 21(a), by extending the plate part 1310 to an intermediate position and sandwiching the ball between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200 while continuing to eject the ball. , can be achieved together.

At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a posture of preventing the ball from passing downward and preventing the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position spaced below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240, so that the rolling surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. 21(b) The ball riding on the ball can be prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. Thereby, it is possible to prevent balls from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000. .

Note that, as shown in FIG. 21(d), at the same time as the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21, the operation of the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 causes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 to interlock. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the drive device 1500 can be used as the driving force of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state has been described. However, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it can be understood by tracing back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

When switching from the open state to the closed state, the state shown in FIG. 21(d) first changes to the state shown in FIG. 21(b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operating direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move by more than the amount of movement of the loaded portion 1330.

That is, since the regulating member 1600 is switched to the ejection state after the opening/closing plate 1300 operates, it is impossible for the opening/closing plate 1300 to maintain the open state after the regulating member 1600 is switched to the ejecting state. I can do it. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent irregular winnings in which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball begins to be ejected.

Moreover, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball contacts the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. , in this embodiment, this can be made impossible.

That is, when viewing the state shown in FIG. 21(b) as a state in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the middle of changing from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward, so that the rolling surface 1311 When the ball makes contact, no load is generated to support the opening/closing plate 1300, which acts in the direction opposite to the direction of the weight of the ball. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the weight of the ball causes the plate portion 1310 to move downward, making it impossible for the ball to bounce up to the detection sensor 1240. This can prevent irregular winnings from occurring.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 22(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 22(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the starting winning matches any judgment value defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of ball entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of jackpot A, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 2250 prize balls.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 49", and the jackpot B is defined in association with it (see 202b2 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of jackpot B, an 8-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 1200 prize balls.

A jackpot C is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 22(b)).

When the jackpot C is achieved, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed using the first operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 600 prize balls.

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), in any case, the first variable winning device 1000 operates in the first operation pattern. It works. Therefore, the difference in the number of paid out prize balls that a player can obtain appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds, and the greater the number of rounds, the greater the number of prize balls to be paid out, and the longer the time required for the jackpot game.

In a jackpot based on the lottery of special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), there is a 20% probability of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% probability of winning a 4-round jackpot. Therefore, basically, you cannot expect a large number of prize balls. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", Jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of jackpot a, similar to the case of jackpot A, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 2250 prize balls.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 89" is associated with and defined as a jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of a jackpot b, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is necessarily less than 2,250 (1,200 in this embodiment), and furthermore, the time required for the jackpot game exceeds that for jackpot a.

A jackpot c is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "90 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of a jackpot c, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is necessarily less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and furthermore, the time required for the jackpot game exceeds that for jackpot a, and the prize balls paid out in each round are The time it takes to play a ball or jackpot game fluctuates.

As described above, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes depending on the type of jackpot. Due to this difference in operation pattern, while keeping the number of jackpot rounds unchanged, it is possible to vary the number of payouts and change the time required for the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (jackpot b and jackpot c), the time required for the jackpot game can be made longer than when the number of payouts is large (jackpot a). That is, when a jackpot with a small number of payouts (jackpot b and jackpot c) is obtained, the timing of hitting the ball aiming at the next jackpot is delayed compared to the case of jackpot a.

Therefore, in addition to creating a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for jackpot games, we can increase the profit per unit time (time efficiency) that players can obtain from jackpot games depending on the type of jackpot. It is possible to make a difference in the number of payouts (including the number of payouts).

As a result, the breakdown of jackpots in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) includes a jackpot (jackpot a) in which a large amount of payouts are received in a time-efficient manner, and a jackpot in which a large amount of payouts are received in a time-efficient manner, and a jackpot in which a large amount of payouts are received in a time-efficient manner. It is possible to provide a small number of jackpots (jackpot b, jackpot c), and increase the profit for the player obtained when winning jackpot a. As a result, while maintaining a high probability of winning the jackpot a, the difference in the number of payouts (the maximum value of the total number of balls acquired and the minimum value of the total number of balls acquired) when playing the game for a predetermined period of time is maintained. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that can increase the difference (difference).

As mentioned above, while the special symbol is changing, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the regular symbol becomes a hit decreases. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640, so it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the variable probability state of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and that is likely to result in a jackpot a (jackpot with maximum ball output) when it becomes a jackpot, will be repeated. This makes it easier for the player to win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 22(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 22(c)). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c2 in FIG. 22(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal ball entry port 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is It determines whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning hole 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning hole 1000a in the second operation pattern. It is a diagram showing the change, and FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid 1510 so that a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

The first inter-round interval time Int1 is set as a time during which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be completely discharged. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and each ball is discharged at an interval of about 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of balls stored. be done. Therefore, it takes about 2 seconds to eject 10 balls.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

In the first operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the first inter-round interval time Int1, it is possible to create a state in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round. Therefore, since the specified number of pachinko balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls) can be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a even after the second round, the maximum length of the first operating time T1 of each round is The round game R can be ended without waiting for 30 seconds. Therefore, the round game R can be progressed quickly.

Thereafter, in the same manner, the third to maximum 15th round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid 1510 so that a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

The second inter-round interval time Int2 is set as a time during which at least some of the balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and each ball is discharged at an interval of about 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of balls stored. be done. Therefore, the number of balls that can be ejected in one second is 5 balls, so for example, if 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are ejected at the second interval time Int2 between rounds. , five balls will still remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

In the second operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the second inter-round interval time Int2, it is possible to create a state in which the balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round. Therefore, from the second round onwards, a situation may arise in which the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) cannot be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R will be delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

Thereafter, the 3rd to 15th rounds of round games R are repeated with the second inter-round interval time Int2 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Here, the elapsed time and number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game will be compared. The balls can be fired at minimum intervals of 0.6 seconds.

First, when playing a jackpot game with the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. Adding the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( =OP(10s)+(T1(6s)+Int1(2s))×15R+ED(11s)). Also, the number of payouts is 2250 (=15×10C×15R).

On the other hand, when playing a jackpot game with the second operation pattern, 10 balls can be won in the first special winning hole 1000a in the first round, but only 5 balls can be won in each after the second round. The time that passes from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (=OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) x 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s)+ED(11s)). Further, the number of payouts is 1200 (=(10C×1R+5C×14R)×15) since only up to 5 balls can be won in the round game R from the second round onward.

Therefore, when playing a jackpot game with the second operation pattern, it takes more than three times as long as when playing a jackpot game with the first operation pattern, but the number of balls that are paid out is about half, making the time efficiency of acquiring balls. becomes dramatically worse.

Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing a jackpot game using the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rarity value of jackpot A and jackpot a, improve attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot, and improve interest in the jackpot game.

Note that although the inter-round second interval time Int2 is set to 1.0 seconds, it is not limited to this, and can be set to various values, and can be changed in each round.

For example, the second inter-round interval time Int2 after the end of the round game R of the first round is 0.5 seconds, and the second inter-round interval time Int2 after the end of the round game R of the second round is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to do this.

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. If 10 balls are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of that round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning hole 1000a, so the number of balls to be paid out is also small (30 balls).

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, so for example, 10 balls were discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If three balls are stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of that round, it is possible to win 7 balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and it is possible to expect a certain number of balls (105 balls) to be paid out.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set the length of the second inter-round interval time Int2 to 2.0 seconds (or more). In this case, there are no balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the immediately following round game R, and it is possible to win 10 balls into the first specific prize opening 1000a, so a large number of prizes (150 balls) can be won. It is possible to hope for a reduction in the playing time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid 1510 so that a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

By discharging the balls during the first inter-round interval time Int1, a state is created in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the second round round game R, so that from the second round onwards, the prescribed number of balls will be maintained. (In this embodiment, 10 pachinko balls) can be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the corresponding number of balls can be paid out, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, while the round game R is progressing quickly, prize balls can be paid out in the same way as in the first operation pattern.

Thereafter, the 3rd to 10th rounds of round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the 10th round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the 11th round game R is started.

In the 11th round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with the timer means and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the 11th round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the 11th round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, the 12th to 15th rounds of round games R are repeated with the second inter-round interval time Int2 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

By discharging the balls during the second inter-round interval time Int2, it is possible to create a state in which the balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R after the 11th round. Therefore, after the 11th round, a situation may arise in which the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) cannot be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R will be delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

Further, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game also becomes smaller compared to the number up to the 10th round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 pieces = (10C x 10R + 5C x 5R) x 15 pieces), and the degree of payouts (number of pieces, speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. , it can be changed depending on the number of rounds of the round game (depending on the timing).

Note that in the third operation pattern, a case has been described in which a large number of pieces are paid out in the beginning of the round, and the number of pieces paid out decreases toward the end of the round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of pieces paid out may be small at the beginning, but increase as it approaches the final stage, or the number of pieces paid out may peak in the middle of the round.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

According to this operation pattern, by changing the degree of payout (number of pieces, speed, etc.) in a jackpot game depending on which round of round game R is played, the jackpot game is given speed and speed, and the player's interest is improved. can be done.

In addition, when playing a jackpot game with the third operation pattern, there is no change from the first operation pattern until the 10th round, round game R, so the player can pay out the expected payout with the first operation pattern. It is possible to play a jackpot game with the expectation that the number of pieces can be obtained.

Further, the second inter-round interval time Int2, which is set to 1 second in this embodiment, can be set to any numerical value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in a certain jackpot type, the second inter-round interval time Int2 of the third operation pattern is all set to 1.5 seconds, and in another jackpot type, the second inter-round interval time Int2 of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds. Settings can be made in advance, such as setting the interval time Int2 to 0.5 seconds in odd-numbered rounds and 1.0 seconds in even-numbered rounds.

That is, by further subdividing the jackpot types, it is possible to form various jackpot games with different inter-round second interval times Int2. Therefore, from the 11th round onward, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the end of the jackpot game, and attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, the change in the payout level may be made to correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when playing a jackpot game using the third operation pattern, the image of a running character is displayed on the LCD screen, and during the first round when the character has stamina remaining, the display The character being played runs well, and in conjunction with this, many prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the character's stamina runs out (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and begins to walk, and the payout of prize balls decreases accordingly.

In this way, by making the payout level of the prize ball correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to empathize with the liquid crystal effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

Furthermore, by playing the jackpot game in the second operating pattern or the third operating pattern described above, each round can proceed based on the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It is possible to proceed over a period of time longer than the production time. In other words, for example, if the ball enters the first specific winning hole 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, the ball may be displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during a jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a jackpot game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of a moving image that is loop-reproduced over a predetermined presentation time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the player has finished viewing the performance during the jackpot.

Note that the effects displayed on the liquid crystal screen when playing the jackpot game in the second or third operation pattern are not limited. For example, in a mode where cheering messages from characters (such as "Good luck next time") are displayed, settings can be made such that the longer the jackpot game is played, the easier it is for cheering messages from characters with a lower appearance rate to be displayed. Therefore, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be played without stressing the player (rather, making him happy).

On the other hand, it may be displayed in a manner that gives more stress to the player. For example, a case will be explained in which a running character is displayed during a jackpot game, and at the same time, the character is displayed resting in a rest area during the interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, there is an interval between rounds every time a specified number of balls are won, so the character can complete the race without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second or third operation pattern, the stipulated number of prizes will not be won and the interval between rounds will not occur unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is reached. Therefore, it is possible to perform a production in which fatigue accumulates without causing any deviation from the game mode (in a production mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the intervals between rounds are short in the first place, it is possible to perform a production in which fatigue accumulates. You can create a scene where you have no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player see the exhausted character and give stress to the player, thereby increasing the player's ambition to recover by winning the next jackpot.

Furthermore, in the case where a similar display is performed, the character may replenish water in accordance with the timing of winning a prize. In this case, while the first operation pattern allows sufficient hydration, from the 11th round onwards in the second or third operation pattern, the number of times of replenishment (number of prizes won) is lower than the first. As the amount of water decreases compared to the operating pattern, and the period during which the character runs (the period of the jackpot game) becomes longer, the amount of water that can be replenished is insufficient compared to the sweat generated by the character, and the character becomes more and more fatigued. It is possible to carry out various presentations without causing any deviation from the game mode (in a presentation mode in which the time is controlled in advance, regardless of the winning mode). As a result, it is possible to correlate the state of the character with the profit that the player obtains (payout balls including time efficiency), and to determine how big a jackpot the player has won (whether it is a medium hit or not). , whether it is a jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily made known to the player through the performance of the entire jackpot game.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed, but in the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, the number of balls that can be stored inside is fixed. It is configured such that the number of items can be changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In addition, in FIG. 24, when a ball enters from the 2nd specific winning a prize opening 2255a, the arrangement|positioning of the ball stored in a part of storage channel 1231 and the 2nd storage channel 2251 is illustrated by the hidden line.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a drive device 1500 similar to those in the first embodiment, and a main body member slightly different from the first embodiment. 2100, a covering front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and further includes a second variable winning device 2800 newly introduced in the second embodiment. In addition, the second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable layer entry device 2800 is provided with a second specific prize opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout during a jackpot game passes.

The second specific winning hole 2255a is a winning hole having the same function as the first specific winning hole 1000a. That is, when a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning hole 1000a or the second specific winning hole 2255a, which is normally closed, closes for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed). (or until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although the details will be described later, the opening operation is possible in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a, so a larger amount of winning balls than usual are paid out.

The main body member 2100 has the following features in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (thin plate member 1110, accommodation section 1120, holding hole 1130, protruding section 1140, discharge port 1150, rotation support section 1160, and support claw section 1170). , a slide guide hole 2181, which is a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182, which is also a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110, and into which the second detection sensor 2255 can be inserted. , a drive guide rib 2183 having a pair of walls parallel to each other along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and extending linearly in the left-right direction; It mainly includes a transmission guide rib 2184 whose walls are arranged in parallel and extends linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft part 2185 which pivotally supports the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800.

The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 disposed on the covering front plate 2200 is inserted.

Each rib 2183, 2184 is a rib that guides the sliding operation of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable prize winning device 2800 is driven.

The covering front plate 2200 has the same configuration as the covering front plate 1200 of the first embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall part 1220, housing part 1230, and detection sensor 1240), and is connected to the upper right direction of the housing part 1230. A second storage section 2250 is provided.

The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of a thin plate formed in a plane with the thin plate member 1210, and has an upward opening and a second accommodating portion 2250 whose terminal end is connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. Storage channel 2251 and a second detection disposed in the second storage channel 2251 with the opening aligned in the extending direction of the second storage channel 2251 near the upper end of the second storage channel 2251 The sensor 2255 and the left side portion of the opening of the second storage flow path 2251 when viewed from the front are closed between the front plate of the second accommodating portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100, and the upper surface is inclined downwardly toward the left. It mainly includes an inclined surface 2257.

In the second storage flow path 2251, when the discharge port 1150 is closed and the balls are stored when the balls pass through the second detection sensor 2255 and are stored inside the second storage section 2250, the number of stored balls is It is configured to have a maximum of 14 pieces.

The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has a second specific winning opening 2255a and produces the same effect as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the ball enters the accommodation section 1230 by switching the opening/closing plate 1300, the detection sensor 1240 detects the ball, and by switching the second variable winning device 2800, the ball enters the accommodation section via the second accommodation section 2250. 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects the ball.

The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening/closing plate 1300 is disposed. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the slope 2257 and head toward the channel forming section on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. Ru. Therefore, during a jackpot game, the player can open either specific winning opening 1000a or 2255a, regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open. In this case, by playing a right-handed game, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Therefore, even an inexperienced player can easily play the game.

Note that the second detection sensor 2255 is arranged inside the second storage flow path 2251 with enough room for one ball to be placed on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing when the remaining one ball reaches the specified number by passing through the second detection sensor 2255), a plurality of balls flow into the second storage channel 2251 in succession. , the structure is such that more than a specified number of balls can enter the ball.

In addition to the configuration of the regulating member 1600 of the first embodiment (shaft portion 1610, extension portion 1620, and ball receiving portion 1630), the restriction member 2600 has the shaft portion 1610 further extended to the left, and has an extension portion 1620. The second extending portion 2640 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction.

The second extending portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load during operation of the second variable prize winning device 2800, as will be described later. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 is able to control the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening/closing plate 1300 whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs the switching operation or the opening/closing plate 1300 performs the switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of .

The second variable winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left and right direction by the drive of the solenoid 2810, and a tip member 2820 with one end supported by the tip member 2820, a transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by a shaft portion 2185; a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and extending from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100; A rod-shaped intervening rod portion 2850 having one end fixed to the member 2820 and slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183; and a transmission guide rib having one end disposed at a position where it can come into contact with the intervening rod portion 2850. It mainly includes a transmission rod part 2860 that extends along the inside of the regulating member 2184 and has the other end arranged in a position where it can come into contact with the second extending part 2640 of the regulating member 2600.

The intervening rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183, while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-back direction. In this embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured in such a manner that the longer the separation distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100, the closer the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are to each other (the closer the distance between them is), the more the intervening rod portion 2850 Movement in the front and rear directions is restricted.

The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184, while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In this embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured in such a manner that the longer the distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 is, the closer the transmission guide ribs 2184 are to each other (the interval between them is narrower). Movement in the front and rear directions is restricted.

Note that the surfaces of the end portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. Thereby, force can be smoothly transmitted from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 2000 taken along line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has an opposing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 having a curved arc shape in cross section, and the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has a curved cross section. The biasing force of a biasing torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the opposing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

In the states shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable prize winning device 2800 for making it possible for a ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 will be explained.

27(a) to 27(c), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) are partial rear views of the first variable prize winning device 2000. In addition, in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c), in order to facilitate understanding, illustrations of configurations unnecessary for the explanation are omitted, and the state change of the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state is omitted. The process is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 27(a), the solenoid 2810 is de-energized and the tip member 2820 is disposed at the farthest position from the solenoid 2810, while in FIG. 27(b), the solenoid 2810 is immediately after being energized. In FIG. 27(c), the tip member 2820 is placed in the middle position of the movement range, and the tip member 2820 is placed in the state where it is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (the final position when the solenoid 2810 is energized). The respective states are shown in the figure. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 27(a), the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. 27(c), the slide plate 2840 , constitutes an open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, the regulating member 2600 is in the ejected state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in a de-energized state, the action of the second variable prize winning device 2800 can prevent the regulating member 2600 from entering the storage state. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in this embodiment, a control mode in which the solenoid 2810 is not operated (maintained in a non-energized state) (for example, the control mode in the first embodiment) Accordingly, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

In addition, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable prize winning device 2000 by switching to the state shown in FIG. 27(a).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the solenoid 2810 is energized, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 to begin to be displaced via the transmission member 2830, and the transmission rod portion 2860 to begin to be displaced via the intervening rod portion 2850. do. Here, in this embodiment, the abutting portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are arranged close to each other, although they are slightly separated in the state of FIG. The operation of rod portion 2860 begins substantially simultaneously.

When the transmission rod section 2860 is pushed down by the end of the intervening rod section 2850, the lower end of the transmission rod section 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extending section 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is pushed down a little and placed in a state halfway between the discharge state and the storage state.

As shown in FIG. 27(c), when the tip member 2830 has completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the terminal position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27(c), the intervening rod portion 2850 slides to such an extent that the inclined surface faces the transmission rod portion 2860 and passes through the transmission rod portion 2860. The load applied toward the intervening member 2850 can be applied in a direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of the intervening member 2850.

This can prevent the load applied to the intervening member 2850 from varying along the moving direction of the intervening member 2850 due to the variation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. It is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 from fluctuating, and therefore, drive the solenoid 2810 to maintain the slide plate 2840 in the open state, which changes state due to the displacement of the tip member 2820. It is possible to prevent the force from fluctuating. Thereby, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is directly used as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860 to change the state of the regulating member 2600. Therefore, the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. This makes it possible to finely adjust the state change timing of the regulating member 2600, so it is possible to suppress the deviation between the control value of the number of pieces to be ejected specified for each interval time between rounds in a jackpot game and the actual number of pieces to be ejected, The number of discharged pieces can be stabilized.

FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27(c). As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the opposing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) that biases the regulating member 2600 toward the disposed position in the ejected state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

Therefore, when the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27(c)) to the closed state (see FIG. 27(a)) and the restriction by the intervening rod portion 2850 is released, the biasing force of the torsion spring As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27(a)).

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol in this embodiment.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in this embodiment is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is It is defined in association with the type and the type of ball entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

In addition, the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64) is as follows. Since it is the same as that explained in the first embodiment, the explanation will be omitted, and below, in this embodiment, the case where a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) will be described. explain.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". is defined in association with jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot d is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 2,250 prize balls plus a limited increase.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "30 to 99", and the jackpot e is defined in association with it (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

In the case of a jackpot e, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player will be 2,250 prize balls plus the limited amount of increase, but the difficulty level of increasing the number of balls to be paid out is higher than that of the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing of increasing the number of pieces to be paid out, the time required for the jackpot game will be much longer than that in the case of jackpot d.

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes depending on the type of jackpot. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, it is possible to keep the number of jackpot rounds unchanged while making a difference in the number of payouts and to change the time required for the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, in the case of jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the first to seventh rounds). If more than a specified number of balls are entered into the first variable winning device 2000, the extra payout will be deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (8th round round game R) and the progress of the 8th round will be deducted. It is configured to take the maximum amount of time. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the player can win the increased amount of balls paid out by entering more than the specified number of balls into the first variable winning device 2000 without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

In this case, in the case of jackpot e, the gaming method that allows the player to obtain the highest profit, including time efficiency, is to limit winnings to the specified number of prizes until the 8th round, and play round games R from the 9th round onward. The aim is to increase the number of prizes paid out with the aim of winning more than the specified number of prizes. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put more than a prescribed number of balls into the first variable winning device 2000, depending on which round of the round game R, and the player's attention to the jackpot game. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the 1 specific winning a prize hole 1000a and the 2nd specific winning a prize hole 2255a.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state and open the second specific winning opening 2255a. This causes the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning position is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the first round round game R ends, the timer means operates the solenoids 1510, 2810 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed. is driven and controlled, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is made to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

The first inter-round interval time Int1 is set as the time for ejecting 10 balls from the ejection port 1150, as described above in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning hole 2255a, it is possible to enter more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) into the second specific winning hole 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls ejected from the ejection port 1150 due to the first inter-round interval time Int1 is 10, more than 10 balls enter the second specific winning port 2255a in each round game R. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of stored balls when entering from the second storage channel 2251 side is 14, so in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of winning balls exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. The number is limited to four throughout the jackpot game. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts over the specified number (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be obtained by a player who plays a jackpot game with jackpot d can be limited to 60 pieces (=15 pieces x 4C). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of pieces to be paid out from greatly changing due to differences in the game mode (timing of hitting, interval of hitting, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows players to enjoy profits fairly, regardless of the player's experience level.

Thereafter, the 3rd round to the 15th round at most are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the slide board 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state and open the second specific winning opening 2255a. This causes the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning position is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is made to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

The first inter-round interval time Int1 is set as the time for ejecting 10 balls from the ejection port 1150, as described above in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning hole 2255a, it is possible to enter more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) into the second specific winning hole 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls ejected from the ejection port 1150 due to the first inter-round interval time Int1 is 10, more than 10 balls enter the second specific winning port 2255a in each round game R. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

Thereafter, the third to seventh round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the seventh round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, and the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed. After the elapse of , the 8th round of the round game R is started.

In the 8th round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the 8th round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eighth round of the round game R ends.

Here, in the round game R before the 7th round, if the number of balls exceeding the specified number has passed through the second specific winning hole 2255a, at the start of the round game R of the 8th round, the number of balls exceeding the specified number Since the balls remain in the storage channel 1231, in the round game R of the 8th round, it is only possible to win the number of balls obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number of balls exceeding the specified number by the 7th round) from the specified number. Since this is not possible, the payout of prize balls including the 8th round is equalized to the prescribed number of prize balls up to the 8th round. In addition, in the round game R of the 8th round, it is not possible to win the specified number of pachinko balls, so the next round must be played after waiting for 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Let's move on to games.

As a result, the player suffers emotional damage as the extra prize balls that were paid out up to the 7th round are lost, and time damage as the round game R in the 8th round becomes longer than necessary. will receive. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game carefully so as not to win more than the specified number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of winning balls exceeding the specified number, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

In addition, if there is no winning exceeding the specified number by the 7th round, the specified number of balls can be passed through one specific prize opening 1000a in the round game R of the 8th round, and the specified number of balls will be paid out. In addition, the eighth round of the round game R can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, while the round game R is progressing quickly, the prescribed number of prize balls can be paid out.

Therefore, in the jackpot game with jackpot e, it is to the player's benefit to intentionally suppress winnings exceeding the specified number until the seventh round. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's attentiveness during the game up to the seventh round.

In addition, when the jackpot game R of the 8th round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 elapses, and the first inter-round interval time Int1 is elapsed. After the time Int1 has elapsed, the ninth round of the round game R is started. Incidentally, at the start of the ninth round, the round game R, it is possible to make a state in which no balls remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the 9th round, the solenoid 2810 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific prize opening 2255a. is driven and controlled to cause the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the 9th round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the ninth round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, similarly, the 10th to 15th round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In the round game R from the 9th round onwards, the opening/closing plate 1300 does not open/close, so the prize balls paid out by the balls that exceed the specified number and enter the second specific winning slot 2255a from the 9th round onwards are , can be received by the player without deduction.

Therefore, when playing a jackpot game with jackpot e, the number of winnings in the second specific winning slot 2255a that exceeds the specified number is suppressed in jackpot game R until the 7th round, and in jackpot game R after the 9th round, Aiming to win a prize in the second specific prize opening 2255a that exceeds the number of prizes is a gaming method that allows the player to obtain the largest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

That is, in the round game R of each round, by putting balls in excess of the specified number into the second specific winning hole 2255a, the player may gain a profit or suffer a loss. As a result, it is possible to provide different gameplay characteristics to each round of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the attentiveness of the player who plays the jackpot game (it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game without thinking). .

In addition, according to this operation pattern, the rounds in which the player can receive additional prize balls by placing balls exceeding the specified number into the second special winning hole 2255a are substantially performed after the ninth round. can be restricted. Thereby, it is possible to narrow the timing at which the number of balls to be paid out changes due to differences in game modes (timing of hitting, interval between hitting, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the number of balls being paid out from changing significantly. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows players to enjoy profits fairly, regardless of the player's experience level.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls that reach the flow path forming part when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and flow down to the downstream of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state fall as they are, but in the third embodiment The first variable winning device 3000 is configured to delay the fall of the balls when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and to allow some of the balls to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the installation front board 3200.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, a regulating member 1600, and a rear cover 1700 similar to the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a covered front plate 3200 are provided, which are slightly different from the first embodiment. Note that FIG. 32 shows the open/close plate 1300 in a closed state.

The main body member 3100 has the following features in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the housing part 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding part 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support part 1160, and the support claw part 1170). , an additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner continuous to the left side wall of the covered front plate 3200 in front view on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and an additional winning opening 3181 directed upward from the left side wall part of the additional winning opening 3181 in front view. It mainly includes a curved extension plate 3182 that extends in a curved manner.

The additional winning hole 3181 is a ball entrance that discharges the balls flowing down the gaming area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and when balls enter the additional winning hole 3181, the maximum number of balls is 15. The given number of prize balls will be paid out. In this embodiment, the setting is such that 11 balls are paid out.

The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts the passage of the ball flowing down the game area by making the gap in the vertical direction in the game area less than or equal to the diameter of the ball, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. . Further, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed in a shape that slopes downward as it goes from the mid-abdomen toward the left in front view, and slopes downward as it goes from the mid-abdomen toward the right in front view.

The covering front plate 3200 has the same structure as the covering front plate 1200 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall part 1220, the housing part 1230, and the detection sensor 1240), as well as the structure between the side wall part 1220 and the housing part 1230. A fall delay plate 3250 is provided that extends from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface side in the region.

The fall delay plate 3250 is arranged on the front side of the movement trajectory of the opening/closing plate 1300 to avoid interference with the opening/closing plate 3250, and is a linear plate arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 and parallel to the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 that is a shaped portion and extends perpendicularly from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and a curved shape that connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 and has a concave upper surface. It mainly includes a rolling arc portion 3252 formed.

The fall delay plate 3250 has an elongated shape from side to side, and decelerates the ball so that it takes approximately 2 seconds or more for the ball to travel down a distance of half the length of the plate (including bouncing and falling due to rolling). It is formed from the shape. Note that the opening/closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that when a ball flows down a distance that is half the length of the plate in the left-right direction, it flows down in one second or less.

As shown in FIG. 32, the extension plate portion 3251 is a surface facing the main body member 3100, and is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. It includes an opposing surface 3251a, and a terminal surface 3251b, which is a surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the accommodating portion 1230 and is formed with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere between the accommodating portion 1230 and the accommodating portion 1230.

The distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is the radius of the ball at the portion located vertically below the center of the ball when the ball is located at the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). At the intermediate position (midway position in the left-right direction in Figure 32), the radius is switched to be greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere, and in the part located vertically below the center of the sphere when placed on the most downstream side (right side in Figure 32). It is assumed to be greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the opposing surface 3251a runs along the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects with the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 3200. (The tangent line drawn on the plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covering front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the upstream position Pf1, which is the most upstream side, to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls and is spaced to the right from the rolling arc portion 3252, is connected to the downstream position Pf2. It passes through and flows down.

In this embodiment, since the distance from the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 to the facing surface 3251a of the extending plate portion 3250 is less than the diameter of the ball, the distance until the ball reaches the falling position Pf3 is , the ball is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the ball does not fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 until it reaches the falling position Pf3. The manner in which the ball flows down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described below.

34(a) to 34(c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. 31. Note that FIG. 34(b) shows a ball placed at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34(c) shows a ball placed at the downstream position Pf2. Note that in FIG. 34, illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b) and 34(c), the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls in the front-rear direction on the rolling arc portion 3252 and comes into contact with the plate portion 1310. As the ball flows down, the radial length of the ball to the contact portion with the fall delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the ball when viewed in the axial direction) is shortened as the ball flows down.

That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34(b), the radial length r1 up to the part where the ball contacts the fall delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the ball. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34(c), the radial length r2 up to the part where the ball contacts the fall delay plate 3250 is made shorter than the radius of the ball.

These radial lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of rotation of the sphere when the sphere rotates about the axis along the front-rear direction. In other words, if the rotational speed of the ball is the same, the shorter the diameter lengths r1 and r2, the lower the rolling speed of the ball (the ball is delayed). According to this embodiment, the opposing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases as it goes downstream. Therefore, the radius of rotation of the ball is gradually shortened as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Furthermore, in FIG. 34 showing the axial direction of the extending plate portion 3251 extending along the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate 1300, the state shown in FIG. 34(c) is different from the state shown in FIG. ), the ball is displaced downward. That is, the more the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the more the ball can be moved away from the first specific winning opening 1000a, so the ball flowing down the falling delay plate 3250 can be deflected from the first specific winning opening 1000a. can.

As a result, even if the ball entry prevention part 1331 is not formed in the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream end, and directs the ball toward the first specific prize opening 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player wins a prize by flying with the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a case will be described in which the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward to the open state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250. 35(a) and 35(b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35(c) shows the first variable winning device 3000 along the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). FIG. Note that FIG. 35(a) shows the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300, FIGS. 35(b) and 35(c) show the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, and FIG. 35(c) shows the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state. The outer shapes of the plate portion 1310 and the ball in the closed state are illustrated with imaginary lines, and illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), an example of a ball that has entered the flow path forming part of the first variable prize winning device 3000 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that lands on the top surface of the fall delay plate 3250 moves to the right in the front view along the extending direction of the extending plate part 3251. If the opening/closing plate 1300 continues to remain closed, it will fall after reaching the falling position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the effect of the above-mentioned extension plate part 3251, and the rolling time of the ball can be maintained for a long time, and the attention to the ball can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), when the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward (rotating movement) towards the open state while the ball is rolling, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate part 1310 will roll. It moves upward smoothly along the arc shape of the moving arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent to the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the part where the ball comes into contact when the ball starts moving is oriented in the front-rear direction, it is possible to smooth the movement of the ball when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating. can.

The flow direction when the ball moves upward, rolls on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311, and flows down is parallel to the flow direction shown in FIG. 35(a). Therefore, compared to the case where the downward direction of the ball changes to completely different directions before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, it is possible to alleviate the discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the movement of the ball before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300. can.

In this way, from the state in which the ball is placed below the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35(c)), the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward, thereby changing the ball to the open state. By being pushed back (flowing backwards) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, it becomes possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the ball, which is placed below the opening/closing plate 1300 and has once become impossible to win into the first specific winning opening 1000a, is made into a state where it is possible to win into the first specific winning opening 1000a by upward movement. Since the game can be returned to the original position, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In other words, in both FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the state in which the ball is placed upstream of the detection sensor 1240 is illustrated because there is still a possibility that the ball will pass through the detection sensor 1240. I can say that it is. That is, the effect of the fall delay plate 3250 allows the ball to continue to be maintained upstream of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state.

In addition, even if it becomes impossible to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the top surface of the fall delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that he may win a prize in the first specific winning hole 1000a, and it is possible to maintain the player's attention.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening/closing plate 1300 forms a closed state, the falling of the ball that reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then when the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring the ball to be able to be revived above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that arrives in front of the opening/closing board 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific prize opening 1000a in the next round game. Therefore, the number of balls that pass through the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and enter the first out port 66 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the opening of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be prevented from being obstructed due to the ball being disposed on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. In other words, in a conventional game machine where the ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening/closing plate, the movement of the opening/closing plate causes the ball to be caught between the opening/closing plate and the glass plate, which causes the ball to open and close. There was a problem in that the opening of the board was obstructed and there was a risk that the player would suffer a loss.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening/closing plate 1300, the distance between the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained (limited) almost constant. can do. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely, the ball is caught between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the glass plate, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 will be hindered can be reduced. In addition, in this embodiment, the ball is placed slightly above the position where the ball may be caught between the glass plate and the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 may be hindered while the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the open state. The fall delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the ball is maintained at the position.

FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) are schematic diagrams showing the downward flow of the ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 36(a), the falling state of two balls that have reached the first variable prize winning device 3000 when the balls are left to hit is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 36(b), for example, By performing a special hitting method (so-called "twisting hit") in which the ball is hit weakly and the second ball is hit hard, the two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 in succession. The flow pattern is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), when the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 arrive at the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 with a predetermined distance from each other by leaving the ball alone, When P1 enters the first specific winning opening 1000a and the opening/closing board 1300 is switched to the closed state, the ball P2 can still be placed on the upstream side of the fall delay board 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time for the ball P2 to completely flow down the fall delay plate 3250, making it easier to maintain the ball on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. I can do it.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when two balls reach the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, the opening/closing plate 1300 closes as the ball P1 enters the first specific winning hole 1000a. Since the ball P2 is placed near the position immediately in front of the detection sensor 1240 (falling position Pf3), the ball P2 cannot wait until the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state next time, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from the plate 3250.

In this way, in this embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down in a row due to a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down with a predetermined interval apart due to a normal hitting method is This makes it easier to receive the effect of the fall delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening/closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds to a state where the ball can enter the first specific prize opening 1000a). Thereby, it is possible to suppress games using special hitting methods such as twisting.

FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable prize winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, a state immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state is illustrated, and a ball bouncing upward by colliding with the opening/closing plate 1300 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, when the ball lands on the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state, the bounce as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball landing on the opening/closing plate 1300 is bounced back while the opening/closing plate 1300 is moving upward. Only then, the ball bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

The way the bouncing ball flows down after that is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 again, or entering the additional prize opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. be done. Therefore, the player can receive a prize ball due to the bouncing ball. Therefore, a ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the middle of switching to the open state ends up entering the first out port 66, preventing the player from making a profit. It can be prevented.

In addition, even if a ball enters the additional winning hole 3181, a prescribed number of balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls) can be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a. The payout due to winning in the opening 3181 becomes a prize ball (additional profit) that is paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the middle of switching to the open state, it is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained by the player. It is possible to improve the ability to pay attention to the ball flowing down.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a variable probability state (high probability state) of a special symbol is provided as an added value after a jackpot, regardless of the difference in the falling state of the ball that enters the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable prize winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment includes a probability fluctuation determination unit that makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) based on a difference in the falling manner of the ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable prize winning device 4000 is shown enlarged. As shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, a transparent window is formed on the game board 13 in the lower part of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and a probability change window is provided on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covered front plate 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulating member 1600 and a rear cover 1700), and further includes a probability fluctuation determining section 4800 newly introduced in the fourth embodiment.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 includes a communication path 4810, which is a flow path through which the balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 flow and extends vertically downward, and a flow branched into two that communicates with the lower end of the communication path 4810. A probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 that is a flow path, a specific region 4830 that is arranged in communication with a flow path on the left side of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 when viewed from the front, and a specific region 4830 that is placed in communication with a flow path on the right side of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 when viewed from the front. A non-specific area 4840, a sorting device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with game balls at a branch of the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 that detects passage of a game ball in a specific area 4830, It mainly includes a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540.

The communication path 4810 is formed to have a length that allows approximately one second to elapse for a ball entering from the outlet to reach the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

The sorting device 4850 is disposed to protrude inside the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and has an open position where the ball flows down to a specific area 4830 (forming an open state) and an open position where the ball flows down to a non-specific area 4840 (forming a closed state). It mainly includes a distribution operation member 4851 that can be operated between a closed position (forming) and a closed position, and a solenoid 4852 that drives the distribution operation member 4851.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding the acquisition of the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) only in the special round (the fifth round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. In the special round, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a period of time that allows the game ball to pass through. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state). In this embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variable state of the special symbol), for example, 40 It is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/1.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. The configuration is such that the state is set to normal after the end.

In this embodiment, five types of special symbols are provided as jackpot types: "jackpot D", "jackpot E", "jackpot F", "jackpot G", and "jackpot f" (see FIG. 40). Details will be described later, but depending on the type of jackpot, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the operating pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000 and the operating pattern of the distribution device 4850 are different depending on the jackpot type. It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to transition to a variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponds to each jackpot type and special It is defined in association with the type of ball entrance that triggered the drawing of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". is defined in association with jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot D, a five-round jackpot game is executed using the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "30 to 49" is associated with and defined as the jackpot E (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot E is reached, a 5-round jackpot game is executed using the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 675 prize balls, and can only rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 79", and the jackpot F is defined in association with it (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot F, a five-round jackpot game is executed using the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

A jackpot G is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 99" (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot G, a five-round jackpot game is executed using the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 750 prize balls, and can only rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

As mentioned above, in the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), there is a 50% probability that the special symbol will have the right to transition to the variable state (high probability state). can be obtained with certainty. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, it is possible to occasionally acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 94", The jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot f is reached, similarly to the jackpot D, a five-round jackpot game is executed using the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "95 to 99" is defined in association with the jackpot g (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot g, a 5-round jackpot game is executed using the 10th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 600 prize balls, and can also occasionally acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

As mentioned above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), there is a 95% probability that the first variable prize winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 will select the sixth It operates according to the operating pattern. At this time, you can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state), so in the lottery of special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball opening 64). This is more advantageous for the player than in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, in order to win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the player must play the right-handed game when the special symbol is in a variable probability state (high probability state). conduct.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the variation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer when the regular symbol hits (1 seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640, so it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can make the transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, it is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbol, and if it becomes a jackpot, it will almost certainly be a transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Since the state of changing probability of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot in which the player can obtain the right to win is more likely to be repeated, it becomes easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operating pattern, and FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning opening in the seventh operating pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830 over time.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the 6th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes a timer means (not shown) to close the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled so as to be held, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the second round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the third round round game R is started.

In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the third round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls), The third round of the round game R is completed by driving and controlling the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the third round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of other rounds, a timer starts measuring the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the mouth 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time is set. After OP3 has elapsed, the solenoid moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.1 seconds), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is held in the closed state again. 4852 is driven and controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. This predetermined time is set as a time during which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a prescribed number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning hole 1000a. That is, in this embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time of 0.6 seconds at the fastest, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, by normal estimation, only about 5 balls can be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the fourth round of the round game R ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, thereby suppressing the sense of discomfort given to the player due to the shorter duration of the 4th round round game R than other rounds. can do.

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

At the second opening time OP2, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of balls stored is up to 6), all the discharged balls are sent to the probability fluctuation determination channel 4822. On the other hand, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of balls stored is 7 or more), at least one of the balls discharged The time is set to be shorter than the time required for the ball to completely pass through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

In this embodiment, the fourth round of the round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so even if the fourth round of the round game ends at the second operation time T2, The number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can easily be seven or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, the remaining ball can be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Here, unlike the prior art, in this operation pattern, there is no need to close the opening/closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before operating in the fifth round of the round game R. , the opening/closing plate 1300 can be operated without any discomfort. This will be explained below.

In the prior art, if the round game R ends with a prescribed number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a before the distribution operation member 4581 starts operating, the distribution operation member 4851 is in an open state. This is because there is a risk that a problem may occur in which the player is unable to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a even though the player is in the game, and the player is unable to obtain the right to change the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state). In order to prevent this, it was necessary to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state while the distribution operation member 4851 was in the closed state before operation (it was opened twice within one round).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game feature is to switch whether or not the ball that won the first specific winning hole 1000a can enter the specific area 4830 in the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. , Even if a ball cannot enter the first specific prize opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before operation, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. Since the ball heading towards the specific area 4830 has already won in the first variable winning device 4000, the player can obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) without any problem.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before operation in the fifth round of the round game R, the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 is controlled by opening the opening and closing plate 1300. While preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it also prevents the occurrence of a problem in which the player is unable to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the variable state (high probability state) depending on the winning mode. can do.

In addition, since the ball that won the first specific winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round remains in the storage channel 1231 during the first operation time T1, the ball that won the first prize in the round game R of the fifth round is It is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. As a result, the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) by winning the first specific winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the 5th round (special round). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as changes in whether or not it is possible.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. It should be noted that the process up to the end of the third round round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, so the explanation will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as the sixth operation pattern.

When the third round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fourth round round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of other rounds, a timer starts measuring the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the mouth 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time is set. After OP3 has elapsed, the solenoid moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.1 seconds), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is held in the closed state again. 4852 is driven and controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a prescribed number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning hole 1000a. That is, in this embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time of 0.6 seconds at the fastest, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, by normal estimation, only about 5 balls can be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the fourth round of the round game R ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (all balls) are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with the approximately 5 winning balls that are possible in 3 seconds, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the balls that have won in 3 seconds remaining in the storage channel 1231. .

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, the number of balls ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round is about 5, so due to some rare cause, 8 or more balls are ejected from the first winning port in 3 seconds. 1000a, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced after all the ejected balls have passed through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, no ball remains in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and therefore the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In addition, in this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, the sixth operation pattern is also used in this operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in .

Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether balls can be stored until the storage channel 1231 is nearly full during the fourth round game R. In other words, depending on the difference in the accumulation of balls, it is possible to predict whether or not the player will be able to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state). You can improve your ability to pay attention to the ball. Thereby, attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls land in the round game R of the fourth round, you will almost certainly acquire the right to transition to the special symbol probability variable state (high probability state). However, since the time of the round game R is short, the more accustomed the player is to the game, the more likely he is to fail to acquire the right to transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the sixth operation pattern. A favorable situation is created.

That is, the less experienced the player is, the more likely he or she is to hit all balls during a jackpot game, whereas the more experienced the player is, the more likely he or she is to avoid hitting all balls and stop between rounds in order to avoid wasting balls between rounds during a jackpot game. This is the difference that arises from

To be more specific, in the case of a hit-and-run game, a plurality of balls are always flowing down near the opening/closing plate 1300, and immediately after the start of the round game R of the fourth round, the balls enter the first specific prize opening 1000a. Therefore, there is plenty of time for three or more balls to enter the ball in three seconds. Therefore, an inexperienced player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) without any problem.

On the other hand, if the ball is stopped between rounds to avoid the ball flowing down near the opening/closing plate 1300 during the interval period by starting the ball after the round game R of the fourth round has started, it is true that there will be no wasted balls. Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening/closing plate 1300 until a while (for example, 2 seconds) after the start of the fourth round round game R. Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state). Therefore, even a player who is accustomed to the game can be encouraged to hit the ball continuously during the jackpot game.

In this manner, the sixth operation pattern has the inherent possibility that the more experienced the player is, the less profit he or she can obtain due to the manner of launching. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is inexperienced or used to the game, it is possible to induce the player to play the game without hitting anything during the jackpot, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the profits obtained from the game.

On the other hand, for players who understand the above-mentioned risks and still decide to stop between rounds, it is possible to provide a jackpot game that requires concentration that cannot be experienced with other pachinko machines 10. . In other words, by performing a round stop shot in which the ball starts to be launched by counting backwards so that the ball flows into the first specific winning hole 1000a immediately after opening the first specific winning hole 1000a in the fourth round, the number of wasted balls can be reduced. At the same time, you can also acquire the right to transition to a variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In this case, the inter-round suspension is performed before the end of the third round round game R, and the launching is started before the end of the third round round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform sophisticated calculations such as starting the launch while predicting the timing of ball entry while also considering the randomness of the flow of the ball that enters during the round game R of the third round. Therefore, if the timing at which the ball that started hitting reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning hole 1000a is as calculated, the player's interest can be improved.

FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operating pattern, and FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning opening in the ninth operating pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830 over time.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the 8th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. It should be noted that the process up to the end of the third round round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

When the third round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, it is not possible to enter the specified number of balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a, so the round game R of the fourth round is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It ends with the passage of time.

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. Note that this opening operation is performed at the same time as the opening operation after the third opening time OP3 has elapsed.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage If the number of balls is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time required for at least some of the balls to pass through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

In this operation pattern, the fourth round of the round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so the fourth round of the round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, if there are seven or more balls stored in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to open the distribution operation member 4851 with the balls remaining in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820. can. Therefore, the remaining balls can be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In addition, in this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, the sixth operation pattern is also used in this operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in .

<When operating in the 9th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. It should be noted that the process up to the end of the third round round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, so the explanation will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as the eighth operation pattern.

When the third round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fourth round round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, it is not possible to enter the specified number of balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a, so the round game R of the fourth round is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. It ends with the passage of time.

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined period of time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it in the closed state again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage If the number of balls is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time required for at least some of the balls to pass through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

In this operation pattern, the fourth round of the round game R is started with no balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so in the fourth round of the round game R, a specified number of balls are entered into the first specific prize opening 1000a. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to end the fourth round of the round game R without waiting until the maximum value of the first operating time T1. However, in many cases, if the fourth round round game R is ended without waiting until the maximum value of the first operating time T1, as in the case where the fourth round round game R is ended by winning a specified number of prizes, Immediately after that, the distributing member 4851 is displaced after the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

On the other hand, if the distribution operation member 4851 finishes the fourth round of the round game R by waiting until the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the number of balls ejected in the interval immediately after that is 7 or more; The sphere can be caused to flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, instead of rushing to win the specified number of balls, the player can win the special symbol by placing the specified number of balls into the first special winning slot 1000a just before the end of the round game R of the 4th round. can acquire the right to transition to a variable state (high probability state).

In addition, as another method, by ending the round game R of the 5th round immediately after the 4th round at an appropriate timing, the balls ejected at the interval immediately after the round game R of the 5th round are placed in a specific area. By letting the special symbol flow down, the player can also acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

In this way, according to this operation pattern, the player can change the probability of the special symbol to the variable state (high probability state) at the player's discretion (selecting the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning hole 1000a, etc.). It is possible to make a difference as to whether or not transfer rights can be obtained.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round round game R is specified. When the activation time is specified (in the case of the 8th activation pattern), by continuing to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a, the player can win the special symbol no matter how the game is played. Since it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state), the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, if the operating time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operating pattern), the player selects the operating time himself depending on the game mode (when to place the specified number of balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a). In some cases, it is possible to acquire the right to move the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) by selecting . Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on playing the round game R, improve his ability to pay attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player a feeling of exhilaration of achieving a variable state on his own. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

The characteristics of the sixth to ninth operating patterns are that the interval immediately after the third round round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round round game is played with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. When R is started, it is easy to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state). That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which it is easier to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the round game R of the third round is long enough to completely discharge the balls in the storage channel 1231, the right to transition to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol is granted. difficult to obtain. That is, when it is difficult to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state), it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the payout of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is increased. As a result, it is possible to prepare a larger number of balls for the player to hit in the normal state that will be continued later, making it easier to suppress the player's cash investment.

These differences can be ascertained by whether or not the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fourth round, so at the start of the round game R of the fourth round, the player can predict the state after the end of the jackpot game. can do. Even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to obtain the right to transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the right to transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be obtained depending on the manner in which the ball enters. It is possible to obtain.

Here, in this embodiment, by forcing the player to make a selection, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player during the jackpot game. In other words, the game mode in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) is the exact opposite.

To be more specific, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round of the round game R, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific prize opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. By winning a prize, the possibility of acquiring the right to change the special symbol to a variable state (high probability state) increases (there is an advantage to winning many balls from the start of the 4th round). In the case of operation pattern 9, in the fourth round of round game R, the period of round game R is extended by waiting for the specified number of balls to be won until just before the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) (there is an advantage in suppressing the winning of balls at the start of the fourth round).

In this way, the possibility of acquiring the right to move the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) changes depending on how the ball wins in the round game R (play mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues multiple times, the player can be prevented from getting bored and can maintain concentration on the game.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the 10th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. It should be noted that until the end of the fourth round round game R is the same as in the case of the sixth operation pattern described above, the explanation will be omitted.

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined period of time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it in the closed state again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a short time.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed is a short-time operation, it is basically impossible to cause the ball to flow down to the specific area 4830.

In addition, since the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state during the round game R of the 5th round, if the round game can be finished early, the ball that entered the first specific prize opening 1000a in the 5th round will flow down to the specific area 4830. However, in this operation pattern, the fifth round of round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, it is not possible to enter the specified number of balls, and the round game of the fifth round cannot be ended early. Therefore, the ball that won the first specific winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round cannot be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In addition, in this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R has the same parts as the above-mentioned sixth operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in the operation pattern No. 6.

Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning hole 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round. Since the other parts of the pattern are the same, it is difficult to understand the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 4000 can be improved.

The 10th operation pattern, in relation to the 6th operation pattern and the 7th operation pattern, causes the ball to flow down into the specific area 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 is filled up in the 4th round of the round game R. The difference is that it cannot be done.

That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not reassured even if the balls can be fully stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the round game R, and the ejected balls are stored in a specific area. You can be prompted to confirm whether or not you want to pass 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage (first step) of determining whether or not balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and before the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass, the sorting operation member 4851 operates. It is possible to draw attention to a different part for each stage by dividing it into a step of deciding whether or not to do so (second step). This prevents the player from playing the game aimlessly and improves the player's concentration.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball corresponding to the jackpot type can be won regardless of the progress of the game in a variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment 5000 is equipped with a ball release adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for the player to obtain a larger number of balls as the number of fluctuations until a jackpot is obtained in a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is smaller. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable prize winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covered front plate 2200, and the like in the second embodiment. In addition to the opening/closing plate 1300, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, the present embodiment also includes a power transmission member 5400 that is slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, and new features in this embodiment. It mainly includes a ball exit adjustment device 5900 that adjusts the ball exit by allowing the ball that entered the second ball entry port 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 that extends downward from the lower end of the rotating tip portion 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip portion 1421.

As shown in FIG. 45, the time difference forming part 5423 has a lower end extending to a position where it comes into contact with the engaging part 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is in a non-energized state.

In addition to the configuration described above in the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 5800 includes an intervening rod portion 5850 with a slightly additional shape, and a transmission rod portion 2860 that can be slid vertically on the left side in rear view. It is arranged so that it can come into contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the ball exit adjustment device 5900 by being pushed down by the branched part of the intervening rod part 5850 (the L-shaped part added to the configuration of the intervening rod part 2850 in the second embodiment in rear view). A push-down action section 5870 is provided.

The ball exit adjustment device 5900 includes a downstream passage forming part 5910 through which the ball that has entered the second ball entry opening 640 flows down, and a downstream passage forming part 5910 that is formed through the thin plate member 1100 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end of the downstream passage forming part 5910 to store the ball. The communication hole 5920 is arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) that allows the ball to flow into the flow path 1231, and the opening/closing member 5930 opens and closes the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for. Note that the downstream path forming section 5910 is arranged in such a manner that it passes through the back side of the second variable prize winning device 5800 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 45), and is illustrated with imaginary lines for ease of understanding. Also, illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

The flow path forming section 5910 is a flow path branched into two parts through which the ball that has entered the second ball entrance port 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920 to direct the ball to the communication hole 5920. After the adjustment flow path 5911 is formed to allow the balls to flow in, and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceeds a specified number (30 in this embodiment), the balls further enter the second ball entry port 640. It mainly includes an excess bulb discharge channel 5915 for discharging the balls that have been removed to a bulb discharge channel (not shown).

The adjustment flow path 5911 includes a deceleration flow path 5912 that is formed as an inverted U-shaped flow path in rear view that curves by half a turn near the lower end, and a flow path from the upper end of the deceleration flow path 5912 to the second ball entry port 640. It mainly includes a fall channel 5913 extending vertically toward the rear.

Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the balls discharged from the communication hole 5920 reduce the load applied in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 from subsequent balls staying in the deceleration flow path 5912, regardless of the number of balls staying there. be able to. That is, the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the weight of the subsequent ball from the subsequent ball, and the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle slope (nearly horizontal slope) near the communication hole 5920. Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls staying, it is possible to equalize the speed at which the balls immediately before the communication hole 5920 are discharged from the communication hole 5920, and to equalize the load applied from the balls to the opening/closing member 5930.

Since the falling channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling ball is not decelerated and falls freely. Therefore, when a series of balls enter the second ball entry port 640, the first ball is decelerated first compared to the second ball, and by obstructing the flow of the second ball, the second ball may be erroneously This can prevent excess balls from entering the surplus ball discharge channel 5915.

In this embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 sequentially retains the balls from before the communication hole 5920, and when the number of retained balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball is placed in the excess ball discharge flow path 5915. The channel length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the balls after the 31st ball enter the surplus ball discharge channel 5915. In other words, up to 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, after the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this period, the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640, and by playing the game with a right-handed game, the player can aim to win the next jackpot while suppressing the loss of balls. On the other hand, since the ball that enters the second ball entry port 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, the ball stays in the adjustment channel 5911 from the start of the high probability state to as it approaches the end of the high probability state. Balls increase.

The opening/closing member 5930 is disposed in a position protruding inside the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510, 2810 are not energized, and closes the opening to a size smaller than the outer shape of a sphere. A movable closing member 5931 is disposed at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, and the movable closing member 5931 is connected to the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and is movable in the left-right direction as the solenoid 1510 is driven. a connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110; a slide rail portion 5933 disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be movable vertically relative to the connecting rod portion 5932; , an elastic spring 5934 whose one end is disposed on the connecting rod portion 5932 and applies a biasing force in the upward direction to the movable closing member 5931.

46(a) and 46(b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable prize winning device 5000 taken along the XLVI-XLVI line in FIG. 45. FIG. 46(a) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is open, and FIG. 46(b) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and balls can flow into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and remain there, up to the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. However, the fourth ball AP54 is held in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920.

In the jackpot game, in this state, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a flows into the storage channel 1231, so the communication hole The space for the ball AP54, which is held at a position where it will not fall out of the ball 5920, to enter the storage channel 1231 is filled with the ball IP51 that has flowed in. Therefore, the ball that is held in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 and is maintained at that position.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 become de-energized and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharge state, the movable closing member 5931 extends and the flow from the adjustment flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231 increases. The inflow of balls is regulated.

When the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 is completed, the state switches again to the state shown in FIG. 46(a), and the ball AP54, which was previously held in a position where it will not come out from the communication hole 5920, becomes the first ball and becomes the third ball. The balls up to this point flow into the storage channel 1231.

In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of balls from the adjustment channel 5911 into the storage channel 1231 is repeated, and the inflow is regulated to a maximum of three balls per opening of the communication hole 5920. Ru.

With reference to FIG. 47, a case where a jackpot game progresses by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. FIGS. 47(a) to 47(c) are partial rear views of the first variable prize winning device 5000. 47(a) to 47(c), the operations of the opening/closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening/closing member 5930 due to the drive of the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

47(a) shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is energized, and FIG. 47(b) shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the tip of the time difference forming part 5423 is on the back side of the engaging part 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 47(b) (on the near side of the drawing), and FIG. 47(c) shows a state in which the time difference forming part 5423 is arranged above the engaging part 1333.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, allowing the ball to pass therethrough.

When the state shown in FIG. 47(a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47(b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520 and closes the communication hole 5920, while engaging the opening/closing plate 1300. Since the portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and movement of the opening/closing plate 1300 is restricted, the restriction member 2600 maintains the stored state.

In the state shown in FIG. 47(c), the regulating member 2600 is brought into the discharge state, and the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, when driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the balls from the discharge port 1150 starts, so that the adjustment flow path is It is possible to prevent balls from flowing in from 5911.

48(a) and 48(b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. 48(a) and 48(b), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the opening/closing member 5930 due to the drive of the solenoid 2810 are illustrated in chronological order. 48(a) shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are de-energized, and FIG. 48(b) shows a state in which the solenoid 2810 is energized.

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), when the solenoid 2810 is energized, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the push-down action portion 5870, thereby opening the communication hole 5920. This allows the balls to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the biasing force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

Therefore, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is energized, the communication hole 5920 is opened and the ball can flow into the storage channel 1231, while when it is de-energized, the communication hole 5920 is opened. It is closed and the flow into the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

In a jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the above-described mechanism, a fixed number of balls (in this embodiment, three balls each at maximum) flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (variable probability state of the special symbol), for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/320. It is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. The configuration is such that the state is set to normal after the end. In this embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In this embodiment, three types of special symbols are provided as jackpot types: "jackpot H", "jackpot h", and "jackpot i" (see FIG. 49). Although details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. configured.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which judgment values for determining jackpot types are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponds to each jackpot type and special It is defined in association with the type of ball entrance that triggered the drawing of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". is defined in association with jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

In the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (drawing based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot h are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot H or jackpot h occurs, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the 11th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls, and can also win a prescribed number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive a prescribed upper limit of payouts.

In the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the jackpot i are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot i is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum number of prize balls to be paid out and the time required for the jackpot game are variable depending on the number of balls that enter the second ball entrance 640 until the jackpot is won.

That is, when a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of special symbol 1 (drawing based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the player can hope to pay out the specified number of prize balls regardless of the timing of the jackpot; If a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on balls entering the second ball entry port 640), prize balls will be awarded according to the number of balls entered into the second ball entry port 640 until the jackpot is obtained. Since the maximum value of the number of balls to be paid out and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the payout of prize balls is varied depending on when the jackpot occurs in the right-handed game, in addition to the gameplay of winning the jackpot in the right-handed game. You can add gender. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game aimlessly, and it is possible to improve the ability to pay attention to each fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 50(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the 1 specific winning a prize hole 1000a and the 2nd specific winning a prize hole 2255a.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the 11th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state and open the second specific winning opening 2255a. This causes the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning position is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the round game R of the first round, the communication hole 5920 is opened with the opening of the second specific prize opening 2255a, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). When storing balls from the second storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 balls can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so how many balls (1 to 1 Even if the number of winnings is 3, there is no problem and the round game R can be ended by winning the specified number of winnings (10C).

When the first round round game R ends, the timer means operates the solenoids 1510, 2810 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third inter-round interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. is driven and controlled, and after the third inter-round interval time Int3 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started. Here, a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 in an interval of 3 seconds, so at the end of the first round round game R, a part of the storage channel 1231 and a part of the second storage channel 2250 It is possible to discharge all the balls that can be stored in series (up to 14 balls).

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is made to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, in the same way, the 3rd to 15th round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int3 between each round game R, and the slide board 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third inter-round interval time Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 from the adjustment channel 5911 each time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the maximum number of balls (30 balls) are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, all the balls will be removed from the storage flow by the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the 10th round round game R). Since the balls can enter the channel 1231, the jackpot game can be completed without any balls remaining in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating in the 12th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started. Note that up to the fourth round, round game R, the operation pattern is the same as the eleventh operation pattern, so the explanation will be omitted.

When the fourth round of round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third inter-round interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the third interval time Int3 has elapsed, the fifth round of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

Here, even in the fifth round of the round game R, the ball can enter from the through hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the balls actually flow through the through hole 5920, it is not possible to win the prescribed number of balls. Therefore, the prize balls that can be won in the round game R of the 5th round of this operation pattern are smaller than the prize balls that can be won in the round game R of the same round in the 11th operation pattern. Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operating time T1 has elapsed, the time until the end of the jackpot game becomes long.

Thereafter, similarly, the 6th to 15th round round games R are repeated with the third inter-round interval time Int3 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third inter-round interval time Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In this operation pattern, the reduction in the number of prize balls and the extension of the round time that may occur in the subsequent round games R from the fifth round round game R are caused by balls flowing into the storage channel 1231 from the through hole 5920. This is caused by the fact that the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the jackpot changes how much the number of prize balls decreases and the round time increases. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of balls that have passed through the second ball entry port 640, while the number of balls that have passed through the second ball entry port 640 has drawn the special symbol 2 (second ball entry port). 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 is related to the number of drawings of the special symbol 2.

In addition, in the following explanation, in this operation pattern, the number of special symbol 2 lottery in the high probability state (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 will be explained. The explanation will be based on the assumption that the numbers are the same.

As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a once. That is, up to the fourth round of round game R, a maximum of 12 balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in round games from the 5th round onwards, the reason why balls flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is when the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911. This is the case. In other words, this is a case where the jackpot game is started after the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) has been received 13 or more times after transitioning to the high probability state. .

Therefore, if a jackpot is won between the transition to the high probability state and the 12th lottery of special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the number of prize balls will decrease. Since the round time is not extended, it is possible to improve the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery.

In addition, even after the 13th drawing, the number of prize balls decreases for each drawing, and the round time increases for every 3 drawings, so it is difficult for players to decide in which drawing they can win the jackpot. can improve their attention span.

That is, for example, if a jackpot is won with 14 balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), the balls are stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the round game R of the 5th round. Since the number of balls flowing into the channel 1231 is two, the number of balls that can be won in this round is eight. In addition, if you win a jackpot with 15 balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), at the start of the 5th round round game R, they will pass through the communication hole 5920 and pass through the storage channel. Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is 3, the number of balls that can be won in this round is 7. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the number of prize balls paid out in the fifth round of the round game R decreases.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in either case, the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 flow into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of round game R. becomes 0. Therefore, from the round game R of the 6th round, it is possible to enter the specified number of balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and thereby the round game R of the 6th round can be completed, so that the round time can be reduced. No change occurs in the degree of extension.

In addition, when the remaining number of adjustment channels 5911 when winning a jackpot is 16 to 18 pieces, in the 6th round round game R, and when it is 19 to 21 pieces, in the 7th round round game R, 22 to 24 pieces are left. The number of prize balls decreases in the round game R of the 8th round when the ball is 25 to 27, in the round game R of the 9th round when the ball is 28 to 30, and in the round game R of the 10th round when the ball is 28 to 30. This results in an extension of the round time.

As a result, in a game where the high probability state ends depending on the number of drawings, as in this embodiment, there are cases where a jackpot is won shortly after transitioning to the high probability state, and cases where a jackpot is obtained just before the end of the high probability state. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the profits given to the players (the number of prize balls paid out, the playing time of the jackpot game, etc.).

In this case, in this embodiment, the benefit given to the player is reduced as the number of drawings from transition to the high probability state to winning the jackpot increases, so if the number of drawings until winning the jackpot is small, Originally, there should have been a chance to win the lottery with a high probability in the remaining number of lots, but it is possible to partially eliminate the dissatisfaction of players who are no longer able to win the lottery.

In other words, if you get a jackpot in the first lottery after reaching a high probability state, you should have been able to receive the remaining 29 lots and receive 59 lots the next time. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is again limited to 30 times can be partially resolved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

In addition, even in the high probability state, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the second specific winning port 2255a is activated in the eleventh operation pattern. It becomes possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of drawings after the lottery is opened and closed and the state shifts to a high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) in which the player aims to land a ball in the first ball entrance 64 in a high probability state.

In this case, compared to the case of playing a right-handed game, the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 without leading to the drawing of special symbols increases, and the intervals at which drawings can be drawn become longer, resulting in a longer playing time. There is a possibility that it will be long.

Therefore, as a way of playing the game in a high probability state, the player should play the jackpot type ( Whether you aim to win the jackpot h) (play a right-handed game), be prepared for the fact that more balls will be ejected from the first out port 66 and the playing time will be longer until you get the jackpot, and play the jackpot game. It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot of the jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of a drop in prize balls (play a left-handed game). As a result, the range of gaming methods to be selected can be expanded depending on the player's preferences and the situation (playable time, etc.).

Note that after the high probability state ends, it becomes difficult to open the second ball entrance 640, and the player shifts to a left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment channel 5911, but in a jackpot of the jackpot type (jackpot H) that can be obtained in a left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by winning a specified number of balls, the profits given to the player (profits in terms of the number of prize balls and playing time) are not impaired. Therefore, even if a player stops playing with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to that player from being lost. A player can start playing a game at any timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of drawings of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (drawing based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (the number of drawings based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) The explanation has been made assuming that the number of balls entering the opening 640 is the same number, but in the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 when winning the jackpot is equal to the number of special symbols 2 until winning the jackpot. It should be noted that the number of draws is unlikely to be the same as the number of draws.

In other words, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, and the player only recognizes whether or not he or she has won the jackpot in the lottery after the reach effect or the subsequent reach effect. , after the button press effect, etc., so the player usually continues to hit the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to hold up to four balls entering the second ball entrance 640. In addition to the number of drawings at which the player can recognize the determination of a jackpot, a state is maintained in which a maximum of about four balls enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, even if a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 when the number of reserved balls is at its maximum, the player will not be able to receive a lottery, but the ball will enter the adjustment channel 5911, so the profit that the player can obtain in a jackpot game will be reduced. There is an increased possibility that the amount will decrease. Pending is extinguished when the fluctuation stops and the next fluctuation starts, so in other words, the longer the period until the fluctuation stops, the higher the possibility that the profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game will decrease. It turns out.

Therefore, it is possible to create a gaming experience in which there is a high possibility that the profit obtained by the player in a jackpot game will be reduced if the ball is left to hit during a performance with high expectations such as a long reach. This prevents the player from continuing to launch the ball during highly anticipated performances such as long reach, eliminating the player's concentration on adjusting the ball's ejection force. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration on performances such as long reach, and it is possible to improve the player's ability to pay attention to the performances.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position, but the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the balls by driving. The arrangement of the spheres within the storage channel 1231 can be changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is disposed below the first variable winning device 6000 in this embodiment, and the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 are placed in a specific area 4830. It is configured such that the state after the jackpot game changes depending on whether or not the player passes the jackpot.

FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 6000 taken along the LII-LII line of FIG. 51. Note that FIG. 52 illustrates a retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covering member 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulating member 1600, In addition to the rear cover 1700), the sixth embodiment includes a new interference device 6900.

The interference device 6900 includes a solenoid 6910 that is disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and whose sliding movable shaft is arranged along a plane that is flat with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and the tip of the movable part of the solenoid 6910. The main body member 1100 mainly includes a distal end member 6920 fixed to the distal end member 6920 and an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the distal end member 6920.

The tip member 6920 includes a long hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The elongated hole 6921 is formed at an angle so that the distal end side of the distal end member 6920 is closer to the thin plate member 1110.

The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction in a through hole H61 formed in a thin plate member 1110 that is arranged to face the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200, and the rear end thereof is connected to the elongated hole 6921. The rear end portion moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. This back-and-forth movement allows entry into the storage flow path 1231 through the through hole H61.

The through hole H61 is arranged at a position slightly spaced to the left from the center of the third ball P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. When the interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 and is brought into an extended state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), the ball P3 is pressed and pushed toward the upstream side of the storage channel 1231.

53(a) and 53(b) are front views of the first variable prize winning device 6000. Note that FIG. 53(a) illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53(b) illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. In addition, balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and a "V" is written on the balls that first enter the specific area 4830 according to the 13th operation pattern and the 14th operation pattern, which will be described later. .

As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), when the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, while when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the third ball is Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls remains at less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in this embodiment, when the prescribed number of balls for each round game R of the jackpot game is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state, the prescribed number of balls cannot be won. Since it is not possible to end the round game R by winning the specified number of prizes, the end of the round game R must be waited until the specified time. Effects that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below, together with a description of the game mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the variable probability state of the special symbol), for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. It is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. After the end of the jackpot game, the normal state is set. However, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, the normal state is set until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times. It is configured so that the symbol is in a time saving state.

In this embodiment, two types of special symbol jackpots are provided: "Jackpot I" and "Jackpot J". Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the operating pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000 and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000 are different. It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to transition to a variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), a jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . In the case of a jackpot I, two rounds of the jackpot game are executed using the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive approximately 285 prize balls, and almost certainly cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state).

On the other hand, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), a jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

In the case of a jackpot j, two rounds of the jackpot game are executed using the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive approximately 300 prize balls and almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

As mentioned above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the player will almost certainly acquire the right to change the special symbol to the variable state (high probability state). Therefore, it is advantageous for the player compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64). Therefore, in order to win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the player must play the right-handed game when the special symbol is in a variable probability state (high probability state). conduct.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the variation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer when the regular symbol hits (1 seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640, so it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can make the transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, it is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbol, and if you hit the jackpot, you will almost certainly be able to transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. It becomes easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls because the state of changing probability of the special symbol that results in a jackpot (for which the player can obtain the right to win) becomes more likely to be repeated. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54(b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning opening in the fourteenth operating pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830 over time.

In addition, in FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the inter-round first interval time Int1 is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). be done. Therefore, the lengths of each time in FIG. 54 are not used for relative comparison, and the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed based on the time relationship described below.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930, which is performed when a jackpot game is awarded, will be explained.

<When operating in the 13th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes a timer means (not shown) to close the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. , the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. After the sixth opening time OP6 has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment), and after the long-term operation time TL has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. Then, after the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the solenoid 6910 is driven to change the interference member 6930 to the extended state for a long-term operating time TL, and after the elapse of the long-term operating time TL, to maintain the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. The interference member 6930 is controlled to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in an extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, the prescribed number of balls cannot be entered into the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53(b)). In this embodiment, since the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1, the interference member 6930 is not activated until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is reached. is in the retracted state, so it is virtually impossible to win the prescribed number of balls, and the first round round game R ends after the first operating time T1 has elapsed.

Simultaneously with the end of the first round round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot be passed to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

When the second round round game R ends, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have passed, and the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to maintain the respective retracted states, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the 14th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes a timer means (not shown) to close the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. , the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. After the sixth opening time OP6 has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment), and after the long-term operation time TL has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. Then, after the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for a short period of time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the short time, the interference member 6930 is held in the retracted state again. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled to cause the interference member 6930 to operate for a short time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a short period of time, it is in the retracted state for most of the time, so that in the first round of the round game, as shown in FIG. It is possible to win the ball. Therefore, while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the opening/closing member 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the ejection state, and the ball can be ejected toward the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820. It can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

When the second round round game R ends, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have passed, and the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to maintain the respective retracted states, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time when it is expected that the number of winning balls will be 3 or more and less than 6 in the first round of the round game R. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is placed on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the player's line of sight is blocked by the ball, making it difficult to visually confirm the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This can make it difficult for the player to check the operating mode of the interference member 6930.

Therefore, the change caused by the protrusion of the interference member 6930 is limited to a slight movement of the third and subsequent balls within the storage channel 1231, so it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not a change has occurred due to the interference member 6930. To allow a player to enjoy the game of winning a ball in a first specific winning opening 1000a and storing the ball in a storage channel 1231 without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the operation of an interference member 6930. I can do it.

Then, the balls are stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage channel 1231, and even then, the first round of the round game R is not completed, which gives a sense of discomfort for the first time, and makes the user actually count the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to create a new gaming experience in which the player recognizes the difference between the types of jackpots for the first time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while making it difficult for the player to recognize changes in the situation (changes in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000 allows the player to It is possible to inform the player of the change in the situation of the game board 13 in an easily recognizable manner based on the sense of discomfort, and to make the player aware of the difference in the types of jackpots. Therefore, attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball placed at the vertical position of the falling position Pf3 falls as it is when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment The second fall delay plate 7260 is configured in such a manner that when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball placed at the vertical position of the fall position Pf3 can flow down toward the fall delay plate 3250 side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covered front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable prize winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is the XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). It is a partial sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the line. The first variable winning device 7000 of this embodiment has the same structure as the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment except for the covered front plate 7200, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has a structure similar to that described in the third embodiment (a thin plate member 1210, a side wall part 1220, a housing part 1230, a detection sensor 1240, and a fall delay plate 3250). ), this embodiment also includes a new second fall delay plate 7260.

The second fall delay plate 7260 is a plate member that extends to the back side of the thin plate member 1210 between the terminal end surface 3251b and the accommodating part 1230, and the second fall delay plate 7260 descends as the upper surface 7261 moves away from the detection sensor 1240. tilt. As shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 extends rearward to an extent that it does not interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300.

As shown in FIG. 56, the distance between the second fall delay plate 7260 and the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 near the detection sensor 1240 is less than the diameter of the sphere, and at the farthest position from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second fall delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member whose contact with the ball changes depending on the route of the ball. This will be explained below.

58(a) and 58(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable prize winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). FIG. 58(a) shows a case where the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state with the ball placed near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, and FIG. 58(b) shows the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state. A case in which the ball rolls toward the falling position Pf3 in the meantime is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when the ball is placed in the vicinity of the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, the ball is moved to the cover front plate due to the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 that occurs when the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, in the process of flowing down, it comes into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260, flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 side along the slope of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 and returns to the falling position Pf3. reach.

Since the distance between the second fall delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball, the momentum of the ball is By having a large value, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling vertically on the back side of the second fall delay plate 7260.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball rolling on the fall delay plate 3250 moves toward the main body member 3100 side along the backward slope of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. It flows down while contacting with.

At this time, by arranging the center position (maximum diameter position) of the ball below the second fall delay plate 7260, the extension length of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the back side can be made smaller than the movement trajectory of the ball. The ball falling from above can be caught on the upper surface 7261 while being held on the front side.

The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of falling, and after reaching the falling position Pf3, it falls as it is. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the fall delay plate 3250 without any hitch.

In this manner, in this embodiment, depending on which direction the ball approaches the second fall delay plate 7260, it is possible to switch between cases where the ball is subjected to the action of the second fall delay plate 7260 and cases where the ball is not affected.

In this embodiment, while maintaining the effect of causing the balls rolling on the fall delay plate 3250 to fall smoothly to a position facing the terminal end surface 3251b, two balls roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 in succession, and Even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a closed state by passing through the detection sensor 1240, the fall of the ball placed immediately before the detection sensor 1240 can be delayed.

Furthermore, even if the two balls do not come in a row, it is possible that the opening/closing plate 1300 happens to be in the closed state when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 is placed in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can be caused to flow down toward the fall delay plate 3250 side. In this case, after the ball rolls to the left on the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260, it resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, the ball can be maintained on the near side of the opening/closing plate 1300 for a period longer than the time required to roll over the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 . This makes it possible to reduce the number of wasted balls (balls that flow down the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first outlet 66) that may occur during the interval time.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging the balls from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member that opens and closes the second discharge port are provided so that the balls can be discharged from the second discharge port. You can also do it. In this case, the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port can be prevented from being discharged without strictly controlling the operating length of the second discharge port regulating member. Therefore, the number of balls to be discharged can be changed depending on when the balls are discharged from the first discharge port and when the balls are discharged from the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened simultaneously, the time required to discharge the entire sphere can be shortened, and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is configured with an opening/closing plate 1300 that moves up and down, and when placed in the upper position, the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a, and when placed in the lower position, the ball can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a. You may try to deflect it. In this case, when raising the ball, there is no need to place the ball in a position where it is sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the raising movement of the ball can be made smoother.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged from a single discharge port 1710, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be placed in the middle of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum number of pieces that can be discharged can be changed depending on whether the particles are discharged from the discharge port 1710 or from an additional discharge port. That is, it becomes difficult to discharge the balls stuck on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. Further, by opening both the discharge ports at the same time and discharging the balls, the efficiency of discharging the balls can be increased and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the distribution device 4850 of the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 starts operating based on the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may change based on the weight of the balls depending on the number of balls passing through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, whether or not the right to transition to the high probability state can be acquired can be switched based on the number of balls ejected, regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the timing at which the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating and the timing at which the regulating member 1600 starts operating are slightly different from each other, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, they may start operating at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance to the entry of the ball changes depending on whether there is a gap in the storage channel 1231 for the ball to enter (whether or not the storage channel 1231 is full) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a predetermined ball entering the storage channel 1231 is decelerated depending on whether the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is close to a full state. In this case, even if the prescribed number (count number) of the round game R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, winnings exceeding the prescribed number can be suppressed. Furthermore, in this case, compared to the case where the balls are decelerated regardless of the number of stored balls, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended while suppressing winnings exceeding the specified number. Note that the speed is not limited to deceleration, but may be accelerated. In this case, it is possible to intentionally cause more than the specified number of prizes to be won.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ball enters the first specific winning hole 1000a by the stored ball, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, it may be provided with a non-electrically operated member that moves by a predetermined amount as the ball that has reached the specific winning a prize opening 1000a passes, and that makes it easier to restrict the entry of the ball in a certain posture. In this case, compared to the case where the stored balls are discharged all at once, the time required for the interval between rounds can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a prescribed number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to store a prescribed number of balls plus one ball. In this case, the number of balls that exceed the specified number and pass through the first specific winning hole 1000a can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, it may be possible to switch between a round in which the 11th ball easily passes through and a round in which passage of the 11th ball is restricted for each round.

In each of the above embodiments, when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a (it will fall), so two balls will not win at the same time. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held and there is a possibility that the ball may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a until the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. Furthermore, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 has a plurality of inlets and a single outlet, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be disposed in the storage flow path, and the flow path may branch toward the outlet midway. In this case, a predetermined number of balls can remain in the storage channel 1231 no matter which outlet the balls are discharged from.

In the second embodiment described above, the case where the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the specified number of winnings (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game was explained, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the specified number of winnings (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the second specific winning opening 2255a. may be set to be equal to or greater than the specified number of winnings (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to construct a game in which the round time is inevitably extended when all balls are ejected at intervals between rounds and balls enter from the first specific winning hole 1000a.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has flown downward from the opening/closing plate 1300 is lifted up again by the opening/closing plate 1300, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be raised by a movable accessory that moves in a constant motion and can pick up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the delay member (drop delay plate 3250) is disposed below the opening/closing plate 1300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening/closing plate 1300 may be formed in such a manner that it slides in a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib may be disposed above the opening/closing board 1300, projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the gaming area. When the sliding opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the ball does not come into contact with the rib, and when the sliding opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball may come into contact with the rib. Thereby, even above the opening/closing plate 1300, the falling speed of the ball can be changed and the flowing down can be delayed.

In addition, as a method of preventing the ball from coming into contact with the rib, there is a method of moving the ball to either the front or rear by tilting the ball in the front-rear direction, and arranging the rib on the opposite side.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the fall delay plate 3250 disposed on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 delays the falling of the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be configured as a curved passage passing through the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300. In this case, the ball that passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and once becomes difficult to see from the player due to the opening/closing plate 1300 is ejected from the exit again. In addition, since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area in front of the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round starts even if the interval is long. It is possible to secure a sufficient area for

Note that it is desirable that the inlet is located below the opening/closing plate 1300 and the exit is located above the opening/closing plate 1300. Further, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the entrance opening is narrowed by a portion of the opening/closing plate 1300 to an extent that can prevent the passage of the ball. In this case, the opening/closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

In the third embodiment, the ball is decelerated by moving the opposing surface 3251a of the extending plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 as it goes downstream, but this is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the downstream direction of the ball becomes smaller, and the ball can be decelerated.

Further, the change in acceleration and deceleration may be reversed. When the ball accelerates as it goes downstream, formation of consecutive balls on the fall delay plate 3250 can be prevented.

In the third embodiment described above, the fall delay plate 3250 is disposed below the opening/closing plate 1300, so that only the balls that have passed through the opening/closing plate 1300 downward are brought into contact with the opening/closing plate 1300. However, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, with a back and forth sliding opening/closing plate, in the open state, the ball enters the pocket where the winning hole is placed, and in the closed state, the ball rolls on the top surface of the opening/closing plate, and the rolling ball opens and closes. A rib that can be abutted when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. A ball that enters the pocket as it is will not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down as the opening/closing plate operates.

In the third embodiment, the fall delay plate 3250 is omitted from being formed at the fall position Pf3, and the ball falls vertically downward at a position immediately before the detection sensor 1240, but this is not necessarily the case. . For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left and right direction, and a through hole is formed through which the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 in the right direction can pass, and the ball is ejected from the through hole. You may also do so. In this case, the ball can be placed above the opening/closing plate 1300 even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is placed in front of the detection sensor 1240.

Note that this is different from the second fall delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left and right direction, the ball that falls at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and lands on the fall delay plate 3250 remains to the right (the detection sensor 1240), but the ball that fell onto the second fall delay plate 7260 due to a similar fall once flows down to the left (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then falls back onto the fall delay plate 3250. reach. That is, the period during which the ball is delayed in flowing down below the opening/closing plate 1300 and the path in which the ball flows are different.

In the fifth embodiment described above, a case will be described in which the channels through which balls that enter from the second ball entry port 640 and each specific winning port 1000a, 2255a flow down merge into the storage channel 1231, and the number of balls entered is related to each other. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls may be automatically supplied into the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the balls remain in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which, in a high probability state, the greater the number of drawings until winning a jackpot, the less profit the player obtains, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the more the number of drawings until winning a jackpot, the more profit the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained from a jackpot won in a short time is small, and the profit obtained from a jackpot obtained over a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be equalized.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operating member may be provided that operates within the storage channel 1231 in accordance with the number of balls stored and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231. In this case, since the operating member moves depending on the number of stored items, regardless of the driving timing of the drive device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to reasons such as the operating timing of the operating member being different from normal.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the structure may be such that a portion forming the storage channel 1231 (particularly a U-shaped portion) moves in the extending direction (left and right direction) of the channel to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231. It's okay. In this case, even if the player moves in advance, the amount of movement is small, making it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the player has moved. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay in which the movement of the member (change in the length of the storage channel 1231) is noticed only after the balls are accumulated in the storage channel 1231, and the attention of the player to the first variable winning device 6000 is increased. can be improved.

Note that the movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of a solenoid, or the driving device may be used to only switch whether or not movement is possible, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the interference member 6930 protrudes with a predetermined number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging state may be formed before the balls start entering the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. Further, a pattern in which the overhanging state is formed after the balls are stored and a pattern in which the overhanging state is formed before the balls start to enter the storage channel 1231 may be mixed in each round. In this case, it is possible to switch between a round in which the number of stored items is 7 and a round in which the number of stored items is 9 using a single member.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be able to change into an extended state while discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing for ejecting the ball and the timing for bringing the interference member 6930 into the extended state, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns for ejecting the ball.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Points to avoid winning more than the target number>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , a game characterized by comprising ball entry prevention means for making it difficult for balls to pass through the ball entry port in a state in which the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port in a predetermined period of time; Machine A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big winning hole is oriented sideways, and the operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates when the balls pass through the opening, and drops the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when multiple balls roll unexpectedly on the operating member, the extra balls may Since there is a possibility that balls may pass through the detection port, there is a problem that there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means can make it difficult for balls beyond the predetermined number to pass through the detection means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball when placed on the upstream side of the ball entrance, the ease of passage of the ball when passing through the ball entrance is determined by the number of balls within a predetermined number and the number of balls within a predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with subsequent balls. Thereby, it is possible to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port.

Note that the means for preventing ball entry may include means for changing the ease with which the ball passes through the entrance hole according to the detection result of the detection means, or means for always maintaining the ease with which the ball passes through the entrance hole. is exemplified.

In gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means includes a storage means in which the ball that has passed through the ball entry opening is stored, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball comes out from the accommodation means, and a discharge port for the ball. a discharge switching means that can switch between a first state in which a ball can pass through and a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port; A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the gaming machine A2 is formed with a volume that can accommodate at most the predetermined number of balls.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the accommodating means is formed with a volume that accommodates a predetermined number of balls at maximum between the ball entry port and the ejection port, so that the ejection switching is possible. When the means is maintained in the second state and balls are stored in the accommodation means, the balls accommodated in the accommodation means can prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent balls beyond a predetermined number from passing through the ball entry port.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A2, wherein the ball entry switching means is configured to be maintainable in the second state while the ejection switching means is in the first state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball into the accommodating means from the ball entrance while the ball is being ejected from the accommodating means. Note that the operation timings of the ejection switching means and the ball entry switching means may be simultaneous or different.

A gaming machine A4, which is the gaming machine A2 or A3, further comprising a drive means that serves both as the ejection switching means and the ball entry switching means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by a dual-purpose driving means. Thereby, space and cost savings can be achieved.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A4, after the ball entry switching means starts changing the state from the second state to the first state, the ejection switching means changes from the first state to the first state. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the state changes are ordered in such a manner that the state changes are started toward two states, and the state changes are completed substantially simultaneously.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the ball that has entered the accommodation means is ejected from the ejection port after the ball entry switching means is in the first state. While preventing (preventing irregular winnings), it is possible to start operating the ball entry switching means from the second state before the ball is completely ejected from the ejection port. Compared to the case where the operation of the ball entry switching means is started after the ball entry switching means is completed, the number of balls that pass through the entry ball switching means, flow down the gaming area, and head toward the out exit can be reduced.

Note that the ordering of state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching means, or each switching means may be provided with its own driving means to control the switching timing. It's okay.

A gaming machine A6, which is any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, and includes a changing means for changing the maximum number of pieces accommodated in the accommodating means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of pieces accommodated in the accommodation means can be changed by the changing means, so that the maximum number of pieces accommodated in the accommodation means can be changed temporarily (for example, in a particular round). It is possible to create a state in which more balls than the number of balls are accommodated in the accommodation means. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine by changing a predetermined number of numerical values using the same-shaped storage means (it is possible to correspond to different specifications). This makes it possible to reduce development costs compared to creating shapes based on specifications.

In gaming machine A6, the ball entry port communicates with the first ball entry port and the accommodation means downstream of the first ball entry port, and allows the ball flowing down the gaming area to pass therethrough. a second ball entry port whose passability is switched by the ball entry switching means; when a ball enters the accommodation means from the first ball entry port, and when the ball enters the accommodation means from the second ball entry port; The maximum number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means is changed depending on when a ball enters the means, and the changing means selectively sets which entrance opening the ball is allowed to pass through. Game machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A6, it is possible to store both the ball entering from the first ball entry port and the ball entering from the second ball entry port in the storage means. Therefore, the space required can be reduced compared to the case where separate storage means are provided for each.

In gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interference means capable of protruding into the interior of the accommodation means, and when the interference means extends into the interior of the accommodation means and interferes with the balls stored, A gaming machine A8 characterized in that the maximum number of pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating means is changed depending on when the gaming machine A8 is evacuated to the outside of the gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the number of balls accommodated can be changed by changing the internal volume of the accommodating means without changing the path of entry of the balls into the accommodating means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the number of accommodated pieces without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In gaming machine A8, the interference means protrudes from the back side of the gaming area into the interior of the storage means, and is configured such that the ball can be placed on the front side when retracted. Game machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of retreat can be hidden by the ball placed in front. This makes it possible to make the operation of the interference means less noticeable while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Key points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing overballs>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at an upstream position of the ball entry opening when the ball entry switching means is in the second state, compared to when the ball entry switching means is in the first state; A game machine B1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big winning hole is oriented sideways, and the operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates when the balls pass through the opening, and drops the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the ball that falls from the operating member inevitably flows down to the out port, so it is difficult to hit the ball without causing the ball to fall from the operating member. There has been a problem in that the number of balls actually hit varies depending on whether the ball is hit or not (the level of the player's ball launch technique).

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when the ball entry switching means is in the second state in which it cannot guide the ball flowing down from the upstream position of the ball entry port to the ball entry port, the delay means operates. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily keep the ball at the upstream position of the ball entrance until the ball entry switching means switches to the first state. If the ball entry switching means is in the first state while the ball is at the upstream position of the ball entry port, the ball is guided to the ball entry port. As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the player's hitting technique on the actual number of balls hit, so it is possible to construct a gaming machine that is friendly to beginners.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be a fall regulating means that is composed of an oblong member that supports the ball from below and prevents it from falling all the way to the end, or it may be a protrusion that is formed from a protrusion that decelerates the ball by contacting it.

In gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the delay means increases the degree of delay when the ball is placed on the downstream side, compared to when the ball is placed on the upstream side.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases when the ball is placed downstream of the delaying means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delaying means is increased. can be improved.

Note that there are no limitations to the degree of delay. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the ball entry switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that the distance between the ball placed on the downstream side and the opening direction of the ball entry hole is larger than the ball placed on the upstream side. Game machine B3 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in such a manner that the distance between the opening direction of the ball entrance and the ball increases when the delay means is arranged downstream of the delay means. is formed, so that when a ball flows down the delay means with great force, it can be prevented from directly entering the ball entry hole.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the ball entry switching means includes a raising means for raising the gaming area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delaying means A game machine B4 characterized in that it is arranged below the raising means in the state.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, since the delaying means is disposed lower than the raising means in the first state, the ball does not move from the entering ball switching means. The ball can be delayed while making it appear as if the ball has fallen to the player. Thereby, attention to the ball can be improved.

A game machine B5, which is a game machine B4, further comprising a rise regulating means disposed upstream of the ball's downward movement path than the rising means, for regulating the upward movement of the ball and guiding it in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the upward movement regulating means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction, so that a load is applied to the ball when the upward movement means rises. This prevents the ball from flying in unexpected directions.

The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the gaming machine B5 is provided with a rescue ball entry opening that allows the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the rise regulating means to enter the ball and provides a predetermined profit to the player.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball that flies due to the load applied when the elevating means rises, as a profit different from the profit generated when the ball passes through the ball entrance. , it is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the relief ball entrance. As a result, even if the ball deviates from the flow path toward the ball entrance, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from decreasing, and the movement of the ball can improve the player's interest.

A gaming machine B7 in any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, wherein the delaying means includes a variable action section that gives different effects to the ball depending on the manner in which the delaying means reaches the delaying means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the effect of delaying the ball can be varied depending on the manner in which the ball reaches the delay means. This allows each ball to be selected and given a different effect.

Note that the manner in which the arrival manner differs is not limited. For example, it may be a difference in the arrival position of the ball based on the ball entrance, or a difference in the downward direction of the ball until it reaches the delay means.

In the gaming machine B7, the variable action section delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position spaced apart from the ball entry hole by a predetermined distance or less, and at the same time delays the ball from flowing down by a predetermined distance or more from the ball entry hole. A game machine B8 characterized in that no action is applied to the ball that has reached the delay means at the position.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B7, the variable action section delays the ball's flow for balls that are close to the ball entrance and the state of the ball entry switching means cannot be switched in time. On the other hand, by setting the variable action section not to act on a ball that is far from the ball entrance and has enough time to switch the state of the ball entry switching means, an appropriate gaming speed can be maintained.

<Points for adjusting the ball release in jackpot games>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , when the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, the number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls that passed through the ball entry port during the period in which the first state was previously formed; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number of pieces.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015- (See Publication No. 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of balls that can be won into the jackpot in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that there was a risk of discrepancies.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the number changing means changes the number of balls that pass through the ball entrance in the state where the entering ball switching means forms the first state, and the number of balls that pass through the ball entry opening when the entering ball switching means Since the change can be made in relation to the number of balls passing through the ball entrance when one state is formed, the profit given to the player in a series of operation patterns in which the ball entry switching means repeatedly forms the first state can be changed. Adjustments can be made.

Note that the method of adjusting profits is not limited. For example, if the entering ball switching means has previously formed the first state and a large number of balls have passed through the ball entry opening, then when the entering ball switching means has formed the first state, the entering ball The number of balls that can be placed in the mouth may be suppressed, or the player's profit (not limited to the number of balls put out, For example, the acquisition of the right to transition to a high probability state may be increased.

In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes a storage means in which the balls that have passed through the ball entry port are stored, an ejection port through which the balls pass when the balls are ejected from the storage means, and a plurality of balls that pass through the ejection port. a discharge switching means that can be switched between a first state in which a ball can pass through the discharge port and a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port; A game machine C2 characterized by comprising an operation mode switching means that can change the number of balls ejected from the storage means depending on a difference in operation mode.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means to be ejected from the discharge port can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that no balls remain in the accommodation means. In addition, the number of remaining pitches can be made variable. Thereby, the number of balls required to fill the storage means with balls can be changed, and the maximum number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port can be physically changed.

Note that the manner in which the operation manner is different is not limited at all. For example, the operation period may be varied, or when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, the discharge switching means disposed at which discharge port is to be operated (operated target) may be varied.

A gaming machine C3 in the gaming machine C2, wherein the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining the interval at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, since the interval between balls ejected from the ejection port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, the ejection is possible regardless of the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be determined depending on the length of the period during which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

Note that the form of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the shape of the flow path may be such that the direction of the load received by the ball immediately before the discharge port from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened, or A rib that is provided in a protruding manner and applies a load to the ball to decelerate the ball may be used as a means for this purpose.

A gaming machine C3 in which the distance maintaining means includes a protruding portion that protrudes from the inner surface of the accommodating means in the downstream path of the ball in the vicinity of the discharge port.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, since the protruding part is protruded into the downstream path, the balls flowing down are brought into contact with the protruding part and decelerated, thereby reducing the ball distance from the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flowing speed from greatly changing between balls that are close to each other from the discharge port, and it is possible to equalize the flowing speed of the balls.

In the gaming machine C4, the storage means includes a discharge path that causes the balls to flow down in a series in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protruding portions are arranged in a staggered manner from the opposing surfaces forming the discharge path. A gaming machine C5, which is projected at predetermined intervals.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C4, the protrusions are protruded from the opposing surface at predetermined intervals in an alternating manner, so that the balls are caused to collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path. The ball can be caused to collide with the protrusion at predetermined intervals while being displaced in the vertical direction of the predetermined flow direction, and the effect of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long period of time.

In the gaming machine C5, the storage means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and rolls the ball just before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that the ball is formed so that the speed of the ball flowing down is greater than the speed of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so that the balls stored in the storage means are Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are ejected from the outlet can be kept constant.

A game machine C7, which is any one of the game machines C1 to C6, wherein the ball entry hole includes a starting hole for determining a jackpot of a special symbol by passing a ball.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of jackpot determinations of special symbols can be associated with the number of balls entering the ball opening. Thereby, the number of payouts in the jackpot game can be changed depending on the number of special symbol determinations required to obtain the jackpot.

The gaming machine C7 includes a starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting opening can enter the accommodation means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the ball entry switching means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices installed can be reduced.

By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means independently changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port. The first outlet and the second outlet are configured to be capable of discharging the ball from the first outlet or the second outlet depending on whether (under the same conditions) the ball is discharged from the first outlet or the second outlet. The remaining balls may be arranged at positions where the number of balls can be changed.

In this case, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so the velocity of the balls flowing down the storage means can be changed. Even in this case, the number of balls discharged from the storage means can be maintained.

Note that the arrangement of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other at an intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branched channel for distributing the balls upstream thereof. You can also do it.

Further, the operation modes of the first discharge port and the second discharge port are not limited. For example, one may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be shortened compared to when the balls are discharged from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls ejected from the outlet during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Incidentally, the first discharge port may be arranged at the lower end of the storage means, and the second discharge port may be arranged upstream of the first discharge port.

In this case, when discharging the ball from the second discharge port, regardless of the period during which the second discharge port is in the first state, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is placed in the storage means. can be retained. Therefore, even if there is variation in the number of balls accommodated in the storage means, it is possible to easily maintain a constant number of balls remaining after the balls are discharged. Further, even if the number of balls to be launched is reduced due to ball clogging or the like, it is possible to easily create a state in which the balls remain inside the storage means.

Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side of a branch at the lower end of the storage means.

In this case, from a state where the same number of balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to switch from which outlet the ball to be ejected last will be ejected from, by the operating mode of the ejection switching means. It can be difficult to grasp the ejection mode of the ball from the behavior at the beginning. That is, for example, when the benefit given to the player changes depending on which outlet the last ball is ejected from, it is possible to improve attention to the manner in which the ball flows down.

<Points for adjusting the ball output for each round in jackpot games>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , a switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls pass through the ball entry opening during the first state; a post-drive ball entry state switching device capable of forming a permissive state that allows the ball to pass through the ball entry port and a restricted state that restricts the ball from passing through the ball entry port after the switching drive by the switching drive device has started; A gaming machine D1 comprising:

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015- (See Publication No. 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of balls that can be won into the jackpot in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that there was a risk of discrepancies.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the ball entry state switching means after driving switches whether or not a ball can enter after the ball entrance opening is closed by the switching drive means, an extra ball may enter. The timing can be reduced and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D1, the ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the ball entry state switching means after driving sets the regulation state in the first ball entry port. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second ball entry opening is formed in the permissible state.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is generated when the ball passes through the first ball entry port and when the ball passes through the second ball entry port. Since it is possible to switch whether or not a ball can enter the ball, it is possible to improve attention as to which ball entry opening is opened by the ball entry switching means.

In the gaming machine D2, the first ball entry port is provided with a drop hole on the front side of the opening thereof, and when the ball entry switching means starts switching to the second state, the first ball entry port is provided with a drop hole on the front side of the opening of the first ball entry port. A game machine D3 is configured in such a manner that a ball placed on the upstream side is dropped into the drop hole.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entry port, the ball is transferred to the falling hole while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. The ball can be dropped into the ball and kept away from the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent balls exceeding the specified number from passing through the first ball entry port.

<The point where the balls join from multiple winning ports into the storage channel>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , comprising a storage means for accommodating up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port, and the ball entry port includes at least a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the ball entry port includes at least a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port. Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the accommodation means is formed in such a manner that the balls that have passed through the second ball entry port join together.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015- (See Publication No. 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of balls that can be won into the jackpot in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that there was a risk of discrepancies.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port merge inside the storage means that can accommodate up to a predetermined number of balls. The number of balls that can pass through the second ball entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port (accompanying number of balls paid out) can be made uniform throughout the game.

In the gaming machine E1, when the accommodation means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the first ball entry port, and the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the second ball entry port. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first ball entry port and the number of balls that can enter the second ball entry port are different, so It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the ball entrance opening is opened.

In the gaming machine E2, the number of balls that can be accommodated through the first ball entrance is set to be smaller than the number that can be stored through the second ball entrance, and when each ball entrance is closed, a predetermined upper limit number of balls are ejected. The upper limit of the number of balls is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is opened between openings when the second ball entrance is opened a plurality of times. A game machine E3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the ball that passes through the second ball entrance port before opening the first ball entrance port, and the ball that passes through the second ball entrance port after opening the first ball entrance port. The actual benefits given to the player can vary depending on the ball that passes through the ball.

In other words, if a ball passes through the second ball entrance before opening the first ball entrance, even if more balls than can be accommodated from the first ball entrance have passed through the second ball entrance, The remaining amount will not be ejected, and the number of balls after subtracting the remaining amount will be accommodated from the first ball entry port, so in the end, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the second ball entry port is the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entry port. The player can only obtain the same profit as if he had passed the number of pieces.

On the other hand, if a ball passes through the second ball entrance after opening the first ball entrance, and more balls pass through the second ball entrance than can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, those balls will not be deducted. The player can earn additional profits as the player will not be disappointed.

<Point where the interference member protrudes>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , characterized in that it is provided with an interference means that is disposed in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the ball entry port and that can be switched between an extended state where it can interfere with the ball and a retracted state where it does not interfere with the ball. A gaming machine F1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015- (See Publication No. 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of balls that can be won into the jackpot in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that there was a risk of discrepancies.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, since the interference means is arranged in the falling path of the ball that has passed through the ball entrance, by maintaining the interference means in an extended state, it is possible to reach the ball from the ball entrance to the interference means. It is possible to block the path of the ball with balls and prevent any more balls from passing through the ball entrance. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the prize balls throughout the jackpot game depending on the operation mode of the interference means.

A gaming machine F2, which is the gaming machine F1, further comprising a stopping means for stopping the ball in front of the interfering means when the interfering means is in a retracted state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the extended state with the ball stopped in front of the interference means, so that when the state of the interference means is changed in advance. Compared to , the movement can be hidden by the sphere. Therefore, the movement can be made difficult for the player to notice.

In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is allowed to pass, and the above-mentioned changeover mode of the stopping means is A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the mode of state change of the interference means can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the mode of the state change of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured in multiple types, so that while the stopping means is maintained in the passing state, The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be varied in multiple ways.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a player will win based on the attacker's movements>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port; A benefit giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player when the ball passes through the ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. In the gaming machine, there is a case where a ball can pass through the profit giving means in an operating mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same; A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is possible to switch between a case where a ball cannot pass through the imparting means and a case where a ball cannot pass through.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the ball that passes through the grand prize opening is sorted by the sorting unit into either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the sorting. There are gaming machines that do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operating mode of the opening/closing plate of the grand prize opening during the period in which the distributing section is in a state where it is possible to distribute the balls to the advantageous route is the operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the operation mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route. Since the opening/closing plate operates (closes), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading toward the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the perspective of drawing attention to the behavior of the ball that enters the grand prize opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operating mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same, there are cases where the ball can pass through the profit giving means and cases where the ball can pass through the profit giving means. Since it is possible to switch between cases where it is not possible, there is no possibility of blocking the ball from entering the ball entrance. This makes it possible to maintain attention to the ball heading toward the ball entrance.

The gaming machine G1 is provided with a stopping means that is arranged upstream of the profit switching means and can be switched between a stopping state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is allowed to pass. As the ball entering switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stopping means is switched from the stopping state to the passing state, and the ball flowing downstream of the stopping means is switched to the profit switching state. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching a means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, by once stopping the ball that has passed through the ball entrance in the stopping means disposed upstream of the profit switching means, the ball can be turned into a profit at any timing. It is possible to prevent it from reaching the switching means. This prevents the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing, no matter how the ball passes through the ball entrance while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. can.

The gaming machine G2 is characterized by comprising period changing means for changing the period during which a ball passing through the stopping means and flowing down can reach the profit switching means after switching the stopping means to the passing state. Game machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the period changing means changes the period during which the ball can reach the profit switching means after passing the stopping means, so that after the ball passes the stopping means It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the gameplay, and it is possible to improve the player's interest until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

Note that the period changing means may be a means for changing the velocity of the ball passing through the stopping means, or may be a means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the ball starts flowing down. It may also be a means for changing the number of balls that are stopped at the stopping means.

The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the period changing means is configured to be able to change the number of balls parked in the parking means depending on the profit given to the player.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to predict the profit given to the player based on the number of balls parked in the parking means, so that attention is paid to the balls parked in the parking device. Can improve strength.

Note that the means for switching the number of balls parked in the parking means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be held in the holding means can be changed by combining a period in which the holding means is in the passing state and a period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

That is, for example, if the period in which the ball is in the passing state is extremely shortened, and then the period in which the ball entering switching device is in the first state is extremely shortened immediately after that, the inside of the ball that was staying in the stopping device may be shortened. Since the number of balls flowing downstream of the retaining means is extremely reduced, even if no new balls enter from the ball entrance, a large number of balls remain at the retaining means.

On the other hand, if the period during which the ball entry switching means is set to the first state immediately after a sufficiently long period of time for the stopping means to be in the passing state is made extremely short, the ball remaining at the holding means may In addition to the fact that most of the balls flow downstream of the retaining means, no new balls enter from the ball entrance, so that almost no balls are retained in the retaining means.

In this way, by changing the period during which the ball is in the passing state and shortening the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter, the ball remains in the stopping means regardless of the firing mode of the ball. The number of balls can be changed.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ball entry switching means is provided with a setting means for selecting and setting a closed maintenance period from a plurality of types during which the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state, and for a predetermined period from the end point of the closed maintenance period. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a period of time has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of periods during which the ball entry switching means maintains the second state, so that the ball stays in the stopping means. Since there are multiple types of periods from passing through until the profit switching means is switched to the first state, even if the number of balls parked in the stopping means is the same, the game balls will not pass the profit giving means. It is possible to control the cases in which it passes and the cases in which it does not pass. Therefore, the ability to pay attention to the falling ball can be continuously improved.

For example, the ball entry switching means may be maintained in the first state for a sufficiently long period of time to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the ball entry opening, and the ball entry switching means may be maintained in the second state immediately thereafter. When the setting means selects the closed maintenance period in an extremely short manner (shorter than the time when the ball passing through the stopping means reaches the profit switching means), the entering ball switching means becomes the first state immediately after that. By changing the state of the profit switching means starting from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set the period from when the stopping means is in the passing state until the profit switching means is in the first state. Therefore, irrespective of the timing at which the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit giving means. As a result, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not a ball that passes through the stopping means passes through the profit giving means, regardless of the number of balls stopping at the stopping means and the mode of stopping (for example, timing).

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is caused not by the first action caused by the entry of a prescribed number of balls into the ball entry opening, but by the second action caused by the passage of a prescribed time. A game machine G6 is characterized in that it is provided with an intentional selection means for intentionally selecting the game.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time by the action of the intentional selection means, Randomness in switching due to the manner in which the ball passes through the ball entrance can be eliminated. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of time in which the ball is not allowed to enter while the profit switching means is in the first state.

Note that an example of the intentional selection means is to set a state in which no balls pass through the ball entry port by passing fewer than a prescribed number of balls. This can be achieved by intentionally blocking (preventing) the ball from passing through the ball entrance.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not V will win based on the attacker's movements: Paka is present>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port; A benefit giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player when the ball passes through the ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched by, and is configured such that the manner in which a ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operating manner of the ball entry switching means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the ball that passes through the grand prize opening is sorted by the sorting unit into either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the sorting. There are gaming machines that do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operating mode of the opening/closing plate of the grand prize opening during the period in which the distributing section is in a state where it is possible to distribute the balls to the advantageous route is the operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the operation mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route. Since the opening/closing plate operates (closes), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading toward the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the perspective of drawing attention to the behavior of the ball that enters the grand prize opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the manner in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by the operation manner of the ball entry switching means while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the ball entrance opening. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the ball reaches the profit switching means.

A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the gaming machine H1 is configured to be able to guide a number of balls related to the time at which the ball entry switching means is switched to the second state to the profit switching means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the player can determine in what manner the ball will be guided to the profit switching means based on the length of time the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state. Since it is possible to make predictions regarding the operation of the ball entry switching means, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the ball entry switching means.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a starting state is formed in which throwing a ball to the profit switching means is started while the ball input switching means is being switched from the first state to the second state. Game machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the ball is thrown to the profit switching means for the first time in the starting state, and the operation of the ball entering switching means is stopped immediately before the starting state. Since the first state can be set again, it is possible to create a game in which the throwing of the ball to the profit switching means does not necessarily start even if the operation is started from the first state. Thereby, it becomes necessary to directly check whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, and thus it is possible to improve attention to the profit switching means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z2. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine has a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Game machine Z3 is characterized by being a fusion machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 110 Main control device (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means)
640 Second ball entrance (part of ball entrance, starting port)
640a Electric accessory (part of ball entry switching means)
1000a 1st specific prize opening (part of ball entrance, 1st ball entrance)
1140 Projection part (part of distance maintaining means, projection part)
1150 Ejection port (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means)
1231 Storage channel (part of the ball entry prevention means, part of the number changing means, part of the ball entry state switching means after driving, accommodation means, discharge path)
1231a Guide surface (part of distance maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of distance maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Projection part (part of distance maintaining means, projection part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening/closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
1310 Plate (lifting means)
1331 Ball entry prevention unit (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 Regulation member (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means)
2251 Second storage channel (part of the ball entry prevention means, part of the number changing means, part of the ball entry state switching means after driving, accommodation means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning hole (part of ball entrance, 2nd ball entrance)
2840 Slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 Additional prize opening (relief entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (rise regulation means)
3250 Fall delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b End face (part of the drop hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit giving means)
4850 Allocating device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit giving means)
5900 Ball exit adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means)
7260 Second fall delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big prize opening in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible, corresponding to each round (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is a risk that there will be a large difference in the number of payouts during the entire jackpot game.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can satisfactorily equalize the number of payouts throughout the entire jackpot game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a gaming area through which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that flows down the gaming area passes, and a ball through which the ball flows down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. a ball entry switching means capable of switching between a first state in which a ball can be guided to the ball entry port and a second state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the ball entry port; a detection means for detecting a ball entering a ball, in the case where the ball entering switching means maintains the first state, the ball passes through the ball entry opening during a period in which the first state was previously formed; A number changing means is provided which can change the number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls that have been entered.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the number of payouts can be uniformized well.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning device. It is a front view of the first variable prize winning device. 9 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line IX-IX in FIG. 8. FIG. It is a front view of the first variable prize winning device. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. 10. FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line XII-XII in FIG. 10. FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along the line XII-XII in FIG. 10. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. 16 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning device. It is a back view of the first variable winning device. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 18. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a), and (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a back view of the variable prize winning device. (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21(a), and (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXId-XXId in FIG. 21(c). (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening in the second operation pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable prize winning device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a back view of the first variable winning device. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. FIG. (a) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable prize winning device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27(c). It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the fourth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the fifth operation pattern. It is a diagram showing time measurement changes of two specific winning openings. It is a front view of the 1st variable prize-winning device in 3rd Embodiment. 32 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. 31. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the falling state of the ball that has reached the first variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the 1st variable prize winning device. It is a front view of the game board in 4th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the sixth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the eighth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the 1st specific winning a prize opening and a specific area in a 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial rear view of the game board. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along the XLVI-XLVI line in FIG. 45. (a) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable prize winning device. (a) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the eleventh operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the twelfth operation pattern. It is a diagram showing time measurement changes of two specific winning openings. It is a partial front view of the game board in 6th embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along the LII-LII line in FIG. 51. (a) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the 13th operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening and the specific area in the 14th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate in 7th Embodiment. It is a top view of the first variable winning device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). (a) and (b) are partial sectional views of the first variable prize winning device along a line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 23, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a game ball or pachinko ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls, rails 61, 62, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling a ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable prize winning device 1000, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the inner frame 12 (Fig. (see 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 640, the first variable prize winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails (a region in which prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal ball entrance 67. If the symbol passes, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery held for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If so, the type of jackpot is also determined. In this pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the special symbol's high probability state (also referred to as the special symbol's probability variable state), For example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery that is performed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as the "special symbol 1 lottery", and the special symbol lottery that is performed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is referred to as the "special symbol 1 lottery". The special symbol lottery that is drawn is referred to as "special symbol 2 lottery."

When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning hole 1000a, which is normally closed, remains open until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed, or 10 balls have won). The release action is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls enter the first specific winning hole 1000a, so a larger amount of prize balls than usual are paid out.

There are six types of special symbol jackpots: "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," "Jackpot C," "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," and "Jackpot C" (Figure 22 reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000 is configured to be changed.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating this will be stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while a variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entries is determined for each type of ball entry port. Each ball is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 (number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls in symbol 2 remains, the next special symbol is drawn, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 both remain, a lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is executed preferentially.

In the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640. become easy. In other words, when a normal symbol wins, the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640, and as a result, the special symbol is more likely to be drawn.

In addition, when a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the second symbol display device 83 starts to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67 while a variable display is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes will be suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls will be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. At the same time as being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal ball entrance 67, the next normal symbol lottery is held, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. will be started.

In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, and the special symbol lottery is After the 100th time, the normal state is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the variable probability state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of drawings of the special symbol. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to shift to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol probability changing). In this case, after a jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c to be described later), the time saving state of the normal symbol is set until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

It should be noted that the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the probability variable state (high probability state) of the above-mentioned special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the above-mentioned normal symbol becomes the time-saving state is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, a state in which the probability is changing (probability changing).In other words, it is a state where the probability of a jackpot is changing (probability changing). This is a gaming state that is easy to transition to. In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability of the special symbol is changing) includes a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of special symbols" refers to a time when the probability of special symbols is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than when the probability of special symbols is changing.

Further, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of normal symbols refers to a state of the game in which the winning probability of the normal symbols increases and it is easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which neither the probability of special symbols changes nor the time reduction of normal symbols (the state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) has increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the regular symbol, not only the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is changed. A long time is set compared to . When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. That is, it becomes easier to draw special symbols.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. , The number of openings of the electric accessory 640a when a normal symbol hits may be increased compared to the normal state. Also, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the regular symbol, the winning probability of the regular symbol (second symbol) does not change, and the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol ( It may be configured such that only the winning probability of the second symbol) is increased compared to the normal state.

At the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2), there is a first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LEDs") 37a serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to various controls performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize winning) by the lighting state. A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol after the fluctuation is finished, and a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of that special symbol is displayed in a lit state. The number of pending balls, which is the number of balls for which variation has not been performed (pending balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The number of balls is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is held up to a maximum of four times, the maximum number of times that the ball is held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits light in a different color (for example, red, green, blue), and depending on the combination of the emitted light colors, various gaming states (high probability states of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be realized with a small number of LEDs. , normal symbol time saving, etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is shown.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by winning the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays a variable display, and a second symbol is displayed in a variable manner using the passing of a ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED is provided. A center frame 86 is disposed in this variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is configured to display the first symbol while the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the The system is structured so that a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

For example, if the special symbol lottery results are "Jackpot B", "Jackpot C", "Jackpot B", and "Jackpot C", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot A", any number among all the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers A fluctuating display is performed in which the main symbols to which are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

Next, the display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to hit the ball toward the right path (channel) of the game board 13 will be explained.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easier to release when the special symbol is in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state, so the ball moves to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting the ball (hitting to the right), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640. Further, although details will be described later, if a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) that is performed based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first ball entrance 640 Compared to a case where a jackpot is achieved by a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) performed based on the entry of a ball into the hole, a jackpot (jackpot a) that allows the maximum profit to be obtained is more likely to occur. Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols awarded after the end of the jackpot or the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right hit. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the variable probability state or the normal symbol is set to the time-saving state, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 unless the player hits the right ball, so the special The player will not be able to fully benefit from the probability change state of the symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (right hit navigation) in the variable probability state of special symbols or the time saving state of normal symbols, the player can The structure is designed to ensure that the benefits of this will be obtained.

In the right-handed navigation, the text "Aim to the right!!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the text. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to reliably obtain benefits due to the variable probability state of the special symbols and the shortened time state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. This warning image indicates that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not the period in which the player should hit the ball into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (hitting the ball to the right). This is an image (a right-handed warning image) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player is hit. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in a normal state (a state that is neither a special symbol probability changing state nor a normal symbol time saving state).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to release in the normal state (even if the ball is hit to the right, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entry opening 640). For this reason, if the ball is hit right in the normal state, there will be fewer opportunities to receive a special symbol lottery, compared to when the ball is hit to the left and aimed at the first ball entrance 64. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it becomes difficult to hit the jackpot, resulting in a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed hitting warning image and encouraging left-handed hitting, the player is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from making a loss.

If it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the third symbol display device 81 will display the words "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" The characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not play right-handed (he should play left-handed). Furthermore, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed hitting warning screen, the clerk at the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is playing an irregular game method of playing right-handed in the normal state.

Note that a method for determining whether or not the ball is hitting to the right is, for example, if the ball enters the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see Figure 2) into which the ball may enter if the ball is hitting to the right. Judgment is based on whether the ball was hit or not.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball enters the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, the right-handed hit warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state (jackpot state), when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning hole 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being played, and the right It may be configured to display a strike warning image. As a result, the clerk at the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed player warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning hole 1000a in a state other than the special gaming state (jackpot state), a signal indicating that fraud is being committed is sent to the hall computer. It may also be configured to output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that fraud is being committed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraud is being committed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be explained. Here, an example of an abnormality in the first variable winning device 1000 is a case where a ball entering the first specific winning hole 1000a is detected even though it is not in a special gaming state (jackpot state).

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the word "warning" is displayed in large letters in the center of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the words "Please call the gate error staff" are displayed at the bottom of the screen. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and therefore can quickly request a repair or the like from a parlor clerk or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays an "O" symbol and an " This is a fluctuating display in which the lights are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "○" after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set so that it is shorter when the probability of the special symbol is changing or when the time of the normal symbol is shortened than when the gaming state is in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so it is possible to draw the regular symbol (second symbol) more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, so the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640 in the open state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the player can enter the second ball entrance 640 by other methods, such as increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the special symbol's probability change or the normal symbol's time reduction than during the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will be constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol win may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and is used to prevent balls flowing down the right side of the game board among the balls fired at the game board. is configured so that a part of it can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 mentioned above, and also on the second symbol holding lamp 84. is also lit up. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol between the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. This may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). You may do so. Further, the number of normal ball entry ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, to the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, a first ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entry switch, the A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entry port 64 when viewed from the front, a second ball entry port 640 through which a ball can enter a prize is provided. When a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, a second ball entry switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second ball entry switch, the main A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

Further, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 each serve as one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the prize. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 640. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, if the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric The object 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the normal symbol's fluctuation display is also shorter, so the normal symbol's fluctuation The symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed on the display. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, a state can be created in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 compared to the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second ball entrance 640, and is in a state where balls can always be won.

Here, the probability of hitting the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) that yields the maximum profit (ball exit) as the jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is that if the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, is set higher than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win at the second ball entrance 640, so it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. The player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by hitting the first ball entry hole 64, there are many opportunities for a jackpot lottery, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, when the special symbol is changing probability or the normal symbol is shortening the time, by passing the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state. Since the second ball entry port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win, the ball is fired toward the second ball entry port 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"). ), it is more advantageous for the player to let the ball pass through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a, and aim to win the jackpot by hitting the second ball entrance 640. becomes.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entry port 64 (lower left side of the second ball entry port 640), and a first special winning device 1000 that opens in the left-right direction is located approximately in the center of the first variable winning device 1000. A prize opening (large open opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery held due to a winning in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that it becomes a stop symbol for a jackpot. In addition, the occurrence of a jackpot is notified by displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the first specific winning hole 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This first specific winning a prize opening 1000a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the first specific winning a prize opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of gaming value (gaming value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on one ball winning a prize.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300 that forms an open state that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by upward rotation, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening/closing plate 1300. We are prepared. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the event of a jackpot, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the opening/closing plate 1300 upward, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific winning hole 1000a, and distinguishing between the open state and the normal closed state. It operates in such a way that it repeats alternately.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64. Balls flowing down the game area that do not land in any of the ball entry ports 63, 64, 1000a, and 640 are guided through the first out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. do.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing drive on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has an input/output function. Various commands and control signals are sent to these via the port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) consisting of a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable prize winning device 1000 has an inclined surface 1237 provided on its upper surface, so that when the player hits the ball to the right, some of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timer unit 80 enter the second ball entrance 640. Almost all of the balls that flow downstream without forming a ball are guided to the flow path forming section.

FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covered front plate 1200 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covered front plate. 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening and closing plate 1300 through rotation, and the power transmission member. A driving device 1500 that drives the ball 1400, a regulating member 1600 that regulates the discharge of balls in conjunction with the opening/closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are installed on the main body member 1100 from the back side. The rear cover 1700 is fastened and fixed as shown in FIG.

The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 that is recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front toward the back side. The ball flows down through the holding hole 1130 which is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is fitted on the right side of the holding portion 1120 when viewed from the front, and the front side of the thin plate member 1110. A protruding part 1140 that protrudes along the path, an outlet 1150 that discharges the balls from the front to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotating part that protrudes from the back side of the thin plate member 1110 to support the power transmission member 1400. It mainly includes a support part 1160 and a support claw part 1170 that protrudes in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft part 1610 of the regulating member 1600 above the discharge port 1150.

The housing portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is stored, a rectangular recess 1122 recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and A through hole formed in a rectangular shape perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 that operates along the right end of the recess 1122 back and forth in the thin plate member 1110. 1123.

The support recess 1121 is formed to have a width slightly larger than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and in the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening on the back side of the cover front plate 1200 is closed. Ru. That is, the opening/closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the covering front plate 1200.

The rectangular recess 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate part 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and its recess depth is slightly deeper than the plate part 1310. As a result, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a tilted position (closed state), the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122, and the opening/closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

The protruding portion 1140 protrudes to a position where it abuts the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200. The ball flowing down is decelerated by coming into contact with the protrusion 1140. Note that a similar protrusion 1235 is also provided in the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap with the protrusion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

The rotation support part 1160 includes a shaft part 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a shaft part 1161 that protrudes evenly toward the back side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arcuate shape coaxial with the shaft part 1161. It mainly includes a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angular range where it comes into contact with the rotating tip 1421.

The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 on the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in front view to the back side. 1220, an accommodating part 1230 extending in a box shape opening toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall part 1220 in the left-right direction, and a accommodating part 1230 disposed at the upper end of the accommodating part 1230. It mainly includes a detection sensor 1240.

The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 in front view, the left side wall portion of the accommodating portion 1230 in front view, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which the ball flows down in the vertical direction. Department will be formed.

The accommodating portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, has a storage channel 1231 formed inside with a width that allows the ball to flow down, and a middle portion of the storage channel 1231 that protrudes toward the back side. It mainly includes a protrusion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side when viewed from the front.

The storage flow path 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion with a U-shaped cross section that opens on the back side extends while being bent into a U-shaped front side, and when the opening is blocked by the main body member 1100, the ball can pass through. form a flow path. Note that, in this embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed from a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the balls flowing down the storage channel 1231.

The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12), which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the back side at the lowest end, and a rolling surface that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a surface 1231b.

The angle of inclination of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal plane of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 that reaches the rolling surface 1231b.

The protruding portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the protruding portion 1235 protrudes to a position where it can abut the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231, and decelerates the ball by abutting against the ball.

The slope 1237 slopes downward toward the left in front view. Thereby, the ball that has landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled toward the left and guided to the flow path forming section.

The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passing, and the number of winnings is counted.

The opening/closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between rolling the ball toward the detection sensor 1240 and dropping the ball downward without contacting the ball, depending on the attitude, and includes a horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310. , a pair of shaft portions 1320 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the lateral end of the plate portion 1310 , and a pair of shaft portions 1320 extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. It mainly includes a loaded portion 1330 provided therein.

The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls when in the raised position (open state), and the length in the transverse direction is covered when in the raised position (open state) such that the short direction extends along the front-rear direction. The length is such that the distance from the front plate 1200 is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is in close proximity to the detection sensor 1240.

Furthermore, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered to have an arcuate cross-section at the upper corner of the opposite end of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised position (open state).

The plate portion 1310 is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmission portion 1332 extending to the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the intervening transmission portion. It mainly includes an engaging portion 1333 that protrudes from 1332 to the right side in rear view (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

The engaging portion 1333 extends to a position that interferes with the motion locus of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on its upper surface. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a, not the corner portion, comes into contact with the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress can be avoided when the engaging portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 come into contact with each other. .

The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disc-shaped main body portion 1410 and an extending portion 1420 extending from the main body portion 1410 in the axial radial direction.

The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 into which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a protrusion pin 1412 that protrudes from near the outer peripheral portion in parallel to the direction in which the support hole 1411 is formed.

The protruding pin 1412 is a part that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and as the tip member 1520 moves linearly by switching the excitation of the drive device 1500, the protruding pin 1412 is displaced and the power transmission is performed. Member 1400 rotates.

The extending portion 1420 includes a rotary tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, and a pushing portion 1422 protruding from the rotary tip portion 1421 toward the front side. Equipped with

The drive device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves a movable member by switching excitation, and a tip member 1520 that is H-shaped in front view (having a concave portion at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , is mainly provided.

The tip member 1520 has a concave portion on its upper side configured to have a shape capable of accommodating the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, the recess is formed in a shape that allows the protruding pin 1412 to remain housed inside while the power transmission member 1400 rotates (see FIG. 20).

The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 that is pivotally supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extension portion 1620 that extends in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. It mainly includes a ball receiving part 1630 whose surface on the side of the member 1100 is formed at the same level as the extending part 1620 and is thicker than the extending part 1620.

The extending portion 1620 is arranged on the movement locus of the intervening transmitting portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmitting portion 1332 when the opening/closing plate is in the raised position (open state).

The ball receiver 1630 is arranged in such a manner that it overlaps the discharge port 1150 (the ball discharges through the opening of the discharge port 1150) in a tilted posture (a posture in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is placed at the lower position, storage state). It is formed in such a way that it is narrowed to the extent that it is not

Note that the regulating member 1600 is biased by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain the ascending position (a position in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, a discharge state).

The rear cover 1700 includes an outlet 1710 that is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the outlet 1150 passes. The balls discharged from the discharge port 1710 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is shown partially torn.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is placed in the closed state, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the cover The opening/closing plate 1300 can be placed along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without reducing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. The thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 1200 are arranged side by side at an interval that allows a ball to pass through. By guiding the ball between them, it is possible to drop the ball along the flow path forming section.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention part 1331 of the loaded part 1330 moves toward the front side of the main body member 1100 in a manner that partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240. overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and irregular winnings (for example, a ball that hits a nail or the like without being guided by the opening/closing board 1300 may be blown sideways to the detection sensor 1240). 1240) can be prevented.

Although details will be described later, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, so the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which no balls are stored in the storage channel 1231.

The open state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. Note that in FIGS. 10 and 11, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is shown partially torn. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated with imaginary lines in order to understand the size of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 protrudes to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. By doing so, the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is prevented from falling.

The ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 1200 rolls along the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 starts from the right end of the ball. The ball passes through and enters the storage channel 1231.

Note that in the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is left between the plate part 1310 and the covered front plate 1200. Therefore, compared to the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that it comes into contact with the covering front plate 1200, the amount of required material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening/closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by reducing the diameter of the movement locus of the tip of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the transverse direction, interference between the opening/closing plate 1300 and a ball passing in front of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates can be easily avoided. be able to.

Here, although the details will be described later, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state, so the balls are not discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the balls that have passed the detection sensor 1240 enter the storage channel. is stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which balls are stored in the storage channel 1231.

As shown in FIG. 10, the storage flow path 1231 of this embodiment is formed with a length that can store a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) as an upper limit. When ten balls are stored in the storage device 1231, the tenth ball stops at a position where it is detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Therefore, the tenth ball acts as a stopper, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh ball attempts to pass through the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, making it difficult for the eleventh ball to enter the detection sensor 1240.

In this embodiment, when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, and the balls remaining on the opening/closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening/closing plate 1300. However, as the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state with the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the balls are not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but remains at a position where it does not completely pass through the detection sensor 1240. do.

When the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but during this switching, the tenth ball is exposed to the accumulated flow while receiving a load from the ball entry prevention section 1331. It is pushed into the inside of the channel 1231 (see FIG. 21(b)). That is, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball remains in a manner blocking the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening/closing plate 1300 is switching to the closed state, the entry prevention portion 1331 stops the tenth ball. This is due to the fact that the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates is different from the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 because it closes the opening of the detection sensor 1240 while contacting (rubbing) the ball. It is possible to prevent the moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened, and it is possible to prevent the 11th ball from passing through the first specific winning hole 1000a.

Therefore, there is no need to set a limit on the period from when the predetermined number of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 until the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening/closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after detection, or the opening/closing operation may be started 1 second after detection. In the present embodiment, the process is performed after waiting until the 10th ball makes contact with the 9th ball (after the center of the ball is placed beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention part 1331 and on the detection sensor 1240 side). ) In order to operate the opening/closing plate 1300, the opening/closing plate 1300 is controlled to open/close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Due to the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 described above, in this embodiment, the number of balls passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to ten while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. Note that in this embodiment, prevention (delay) of ball entry can be performed only for the 11th ball. That is, the first to tenth balls can pass the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state compared to the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in all spheres.

For example, in the case of a structure in which a ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 is decelerated once at the passing position, thereby delaying the winning of subsequent balls, it is easy to suppress the winning of the 11th ball, while the winning of the 11th ball is easily suppressed. Since each of the 10th balls from 1 to 3 is partially connected and decelerates the balls as they roll on the rolling surface 1311, the time it takes for the 10th ball to pass the detection sensor 1240 is There was a problem that the game became long and the game was postponed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the configuration that decelerates the first to tenth balls is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240, so the first to tenth balls are Even if the balls flow down one after the other, they can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at the same speed as they flow down, making it possible to speed up the game.

Furthermore, even if most of the period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state has elapsed due to repairs such as a ball jam, and the game is started towards the end of that period, the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 will be ignored. There's no slowing down, so you can let more pitches in.

Regarding the 11th ball, no matter how fast it flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that allows it to reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening/closing plate 1300 starts its tilting operation), regardless of its speed, , the 11th ball can be physically prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th balls.

With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement of the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIG. 12 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 1000 taken along the line XII-XII in FIG. Note that in FIG. 12, balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated.

Here, the mechanism by which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are arranged in the same manner each time will be explained. First, the ball P1 that first enters the storage channel 1231 in an empty state is guided by the guide surface 1231a that slopes backward at the lowest part of the storage channel 1231, and is placed in a position where it comes into contact with the front of the regulating member 1600. Ru.

The ball P1 is weighted by the subsequently entered ball P2 that reaches the lower end, and settles into the arrangement shown in FIG. 12. The ball P2 has a degree of freedom in placement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the ball P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, depending on how the pachinko machine 10 falls in the front-rear direction when it is placed, it may lean toward the covered front plate 1200 or it may lean toward the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. Note that, as shown in FIG. 12, the protruding portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 1140 abuts the ball P2, so when the protruding portion 1140 is in contact with the ball P1, the ball P2 is in contact with the main body member. It does not come into contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

A weight is applied to the ball P2 when the ball P3, which subsequently enters the ball, reaches a position where it comes into contact with the ball P2. Here, in this embodiment, the protruding part 1235 disposed on the covering front plate 1200 is connected to the protruding part 1235 on the right side of the ball P2, no matter where the ball P2 is located in the front-rear direction. The ball P3 is disposed at a position where it is impossible for the ball P3 to enter between the front cover plate 1200 and come into contact with the thin plate member 1210 of the cover front plate 1200 (a position where the gap between the ball P3 and the ball P2 is kept small).

Therefore, no matter where the ball P2 is located in the front-back direction, the center position of the ball P3 will be placed on the back side of the center position of the ball P2, and the ball P3 will be placed on the back side of the ball P2 (upper side in FIG. 12). ). Therefore, the ball P2 is pushed toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 12) due to the load on the ball P3. As a result, the sphere P2 settles into the arrangement shown in FIG. 12.

Thereafter, the ball P3 receives a load from the subsequently entering ball P4 under almost the same conditions as the conditions under which the ball P2 received the load from the ball P3 (except that the front and back direction is reversed), and the ball P3 settles into the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

That is, the arrangement of the nth ball that entered the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n+1)th ball that entered the storage channel 1231. In addition, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the balls is not fixed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but by maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the ball, and by installing protrusions 1140 at predetermined locations. This is realized by arranging 1235. Thereby, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

As described above, in this embodiment, by arranging the protrusions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the balls are stored in a fixed arrangement every time the action of storing the balls in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, the number of items stored each time can be unified.

With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of balls from the storage channel 1231 will be described. 13(a) and 13(b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XII-XII in FIG. 10. In addition, in FIG. 13(a), the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b, and in FIG. 13(b), the ball P2 is ejected and the ball P3 is in the position of the ball P2 in FIG. The state where it is arranged is shown in the figure.

As will be described later, as the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the opening/closing plate 1300 is brought into the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is put into the discharge state and the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. When ejecting the ball. The ball placed at the lowest end (ball P1 in FIG. 12) is ejected to the back side along the slope of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following ball (ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are ejected one after the other.

Here, since the angle of inclination of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal plane of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231 (channel extending in the left-right direction), the velocity of the ball P1 decreases. is greater than the velocity of the ball P2, so a gap is created between the balls P1 and P2 (see FIG. 13(a)). Therefore, the load applied from ball P2 to ball P1 when ball P1 is ejected can be minimized, so the speed at which ball P1 is ejected is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after ball P1. can be converted into

After the ball P1 is discharged, the following balls P2, P3, and P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the slope of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 come into contact with the protrusions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13(a)). Due to this contact, the balls P3 and P4 are redirected in directions DP3 and DP4 having a longitudinal component, pass through the positions of the leading balls P2 and P3, respectively, and are decelerated.

In other words, by coming into contact with the protrusions 1140 and 1235, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231, and the balls stored earlier are stopped. The vehicle will be relocated to its previous position and decelerated.

This creates a gap between the balls P2 and P3 (see Figure 13(b)), and the load applied from the ball P3 to the ball P2 when the ball P2 is ejected can be minimized. , the speed at which the balls P2 are discharged can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the balls P2.

That is, since the subsequent balls flow down the storage flow path 1231 for a longer distance, the more the number of stored balls increases, the more the subsequent balls are accelerated by gravity, and accordingly, the ejection mode of the ball P2 (the speed at the time of ejection, Although there is a possibility that the ejection interval between the ball P1 and the ball P1 may change, the change in the ejection mode is caused by the effect of the protrusions 1140 and 1235 described above (the ball riding on the rolling surface 1231b and the ball being ejected, and the subsequent ball discharging from the ball P1). This can be suppressed by creating a gap between the ball and the ball to eliminate the load due to gravity.

Thereafter, the subsequent balls repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13(a) to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13(b), thereby discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231. As described above, by creating a gap between the ball that is ejected by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the ejected ball is ejected without being affected by the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 1231, the manner in which the balls are discharged (speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) can be made uniform.

In other words, in this embodiment, the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 can equalize the manner in which the balls are ejected (speed during ejection, ejection interval, etc.). In this embodiment, the manner in which the balls are ejected is such that it takes about 0.2 seconds for one ball to be ejected. Therefore, by maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state for 2 seconds or more, all of the maximum number of balls (10) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged.

14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 1000 is a cross-sectional view. Note that in FIGS. 14 to 16, the open/close plate 1300 is shown in a closed state, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-energized state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is positioned above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300. placed at a distance.

Since the intervening transmission section 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the upper side and separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive any load from the intervening transmitting section 1332, and the regulating member 1600 is supported by the torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the ejected state by the biasing force.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention portion 1331 projects in such a manner that the opening size of the detection sensor 1240 is smaller than or equal to the projected area of the ball. This makes it possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XIX-XIX in FIG. 1000 is a cross-sectional view. Note that in FIGS. 17 to 19, the open/close plate 1300 is shown in an open state, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. The engaging part 1333 is pushed into the pushing part 1422.

The interposed transmission section 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates, and in this state, the extending section 1620 of the regulating member 1600 receives a load from the interposed transmitting section 1332, changing the posture of the regulating member 1600. is switched to a tilted posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, a load due to the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and a biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulating member 1600. In this embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring A structure is adopted that can suppress the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when maintaining the opening/closing plate 1300 in an open state while maintaining a large value. The large biasing force of the torsion spring makes it possible to immediately switch the regulating member 1600 to the discharge state, which leads to the effect that the balls can be quickly discharged from the storage channel 1231. The adopted structure will be explained below.

In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, When switched to , the power transmission member 1400 is pushed outward along the rotational axis direction of the motion locus E1. Note that the motion trajectory E1 is illustrated as the outline of the movement trajectory of a portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening/closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not applied to the operating direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400, but to the surface forming the rotation direction. is applied in the axial direction, which is perpendicular to the Therefore, the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 can be prevented from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

That is, the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) that biases the regulating member 1600 is directed in the direction of pushing the opening/closing plate 1300 back toward the closed state, but no matter how large the biasing force is, this biasing force is not the driving force. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

Thereby, once the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state from varying due to the load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continue applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the switching plate 1300 at the maximum value.

That is, after the solenoid 1510 is energized to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the storage state against the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage is reduced. However, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, even if a varying load is applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state without being affected by the load.

An example of the variable load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 is a load applied by the weight of the ball. That is, for example, since the opening/closing plate 1300 is configured such that a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311, it receives a load due to the weight of the ball when the ball lands, and since the number of balls changes frequently, the opening/closing plate 1300 1300 is given a varying load. Further, for example, since a load is applied to the regulating member 1600 from a ball stored in the storage channel 1231, especially a ball disposed at the lowest end of the storage channel 1231, there may be cases where the ball is present or not. A varying load is applied.

Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked, it is not possible to bring the regulating member 1600 into the discharge state while maintaining the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300. Therefore, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it is physically impossible for more balls than can be accumulated in the storage channel 1231 (in this embodiment, 10 or more balls) to pass through the detection sensor 1240. It can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in an open state in an unauthorized manner and the number of prize balls to be won is increased.

20 and 21 illustrate the operations of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. FIG. 20(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20(b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). 20(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21(b) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000. 21(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XXIb-XXIb. It is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 1000 along the line -XXId.

In addition, in FIGS. 20 and 21, for easy understanding, only the opening/closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 are maintained in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). The illustration of the other components is omitted, and the state change of the opening/closing plate 1300 from the open state to the closed state is shown in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is de-energized) is shown. , FIG. 20(c) shows a state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and placed at a position away from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1, as shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). ), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and placed at a position away from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2 is shown in FIGS. 21(c) and 21(d). 1520 is displaced and placed at a position separated by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 from the reference line O1 (the final position when the solenoid 1510 is energized).

In addition, in FIG. 21(b), the first specific winning hole 1000a arranged on the near side is illustrated with an imaginary line for reference, and the outline of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as the one used in the illustration is illustrated with an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening/closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21(b) without interfering with the ball.

From the state shown in FIG. 20(a) to the state shown in FIG. 20(c), the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening/closing plate 1300 maintains the same posture. In addition, in FIG. 20(c), the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 are in contact with each other.

This allows momentum to be applied to the power transmission member 1400 before the opening/closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state, so compared to the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 starts rotating at the same time as the power transmitting member 1400 starts rotating. As a result, the driving force required at the start of rotation (initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 20(c) to the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharge state, while the opening/closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and changes between the closed state and the open state. (See FIG. 21(b)).

In the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21(b), when the ball flows down to the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 (the right side in FIG. 21(b)) due to the plate portion 1310 being extended to the front side. , the ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the ball acts in a direction pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21(b)), but power is transmitted by moving the tip member 1520 to the right in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21(a)). Since a load is applied to the engaging portion 1333 in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21(b)) via the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing plate 1310 from rotating due to the weight of the ball.

Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21(b), balls can be prevented from passing downward through the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 while allowing the balls to be discharged from the discharge port 1150. .

This solves the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state during the time required for discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231, and the conflicting problem of shortening the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 (shortening the interval). In the state shown in FIG. 21(a), by extending the plate part 1310 to an intermediate position and sandwiching the ball between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200 while continuing to eject the ball. , can be achieved together.

At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a posture of preventing the ball from passing downward and preventing the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position spaced below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240, so that the rolling surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. 21(b) The ball riding on the ball can be prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. Thereby, it is possible to prevent balls from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable winning device 1000. .

Note that, as shown in FIG. 21(d), at the same time as the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21, the operation of the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 causes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 to interlock. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the drive device 1500 can be used as the driving force of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state has been described. However, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it can be understood by tracing back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

When switching from the open state to the closed state, the state shown in FIG. 21(d) first changes to the state shown in FIG. 21(b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operating direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move by more than the amount of movement of the loaded portion 1330.

That is, since the regulating member 1600 is switched to the ejection state after the opening/closing plate 1300 operates, it is impossible for the opening/closing plate 1300 to maintain the open state after the regulating member 1600 is switched to the ejecting state. I can do it. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent irregular winnings in which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball begins to be ejected.

Moreover, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball contacts the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. , in this embodiment, this can be made impossible.

That is, when viewing the state shown in FIG. 21(b) as a state in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the middle of changing from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward, so that the rolling surface 1311 When the ball makes contact, no load is generated to support the opening/closing plate 1300, which acts in the direction opposite to the direction of the weight of the ball. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the weight of the ball causes the plate portion 1310 to move downward, making it impossible for the ball to bounce up to the detection sensor 1240. This can prevent irregular winnings from occurring.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 22(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 22(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the starting winning matches any judgment value defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of ball entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of jackpot A, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 2250 prize balls.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 49", and the jackpot B is defined in association with it (see 202b2 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of jackpot B, an 8-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 1200 prize balls.

A jackpot C is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 22(b)).

When the jackpot C is achieved, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed using the first operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 600 prize balls.

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), in any case, the first variable winning device 1000 operates in the first operation pattern. It works. Therefore, the difference in the number of paid out prize balls that a player can obtain appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds, and the greater the number of rounds, the greater the number of prize balls to be paid out, and the longer the time required for the jackpot game.

In a jackpot based on the lottery of special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), there is a 20% probability of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% probability of winning a 4-round jackpot. Therefore, basically, you cannot expect a large number of prize balls. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", Jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of jackpot a, similar to the case of jackpot A, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive approximately 2250 prize balls.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 89" is associated with and defined as a jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of a jackpot b, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is necessarily less than 2,250 (1,200 in this embodiment), and furthermore, the time required for the jackpot game exceeds that for jackpot a.

A jackpot c is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "90 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of a jackpot c, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 1000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is necessarily less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and furthermore, the time required for the jackpot game exceeds that for jackpot a, and the prize balls paid out in each round are The time it takes to play a ball or jackpot game fluctuates.

As described above, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes depending on the type of jackpot. Due to this difference in operation pattern, while keeping the number of jackpot rounds unchanged, it is possible to vary the number of payouts and change the time required for the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (jackpot b and jackpot c), the time required for the jackpot game can be made longer than when the number of payouts is large (jackpot a). That is, when a jackpot with a small number of payouts (jackpot b and jackpot c) is obtained, the timing of hitting the ball aiming at the next jackpot is delayed compared to the case of jackpot a.

Therefore, in addition to creating a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for jackpot games, we can increase the profit per unit time (time efficiency) that players can obtain from jackpot games depending on the type of jackpot. It is possible to make a difference in the number of payouts (including the number of payouts).

As a result, the breakdown of jackpots in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) includes a jackpot (jackpot a) in which a large amount of payouts are received in a time-efficient manner, and a jackpot in which a large amount of payouts are received in a time-efficient manner, and a jackpot in which a large amount of payouts are received in a time-efficient manner. It is possible to provide a small number of jackpots (jackpot b, jackpot c), and increase the profit for the player obtained when winning jackpot a. As a result, while maintaining a high probability of winning the jackpot a, the difference in the number of payouts (the maximum value of the total number of balls acquired and the minimum value of the total number of balls acquired) when playing the game for a predetermined period of time is maintained. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that can increase the difference (difference).

As mentioned above, while the special symbol is changing, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the regular symbol becomes a hit decreases. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640, so it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the variable probability state of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and that is likely to result in a jackpot a (jackpot with maximum ball output) when it becomes a jackpot, will be repeated. This makes it easier for the player to win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 22(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 22(c)). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c2 in FIG. 22(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal ball entry port 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is It determines whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning hole 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning hole 1000a in the second operation pattern. It is a diagram showing the change, and FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the first specific winning a prize opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid 1510 so that a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

The first inter-round interval time Int1 is set as a time during which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be completely discharged. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and each ball is discharged at an interval of about 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of balls stored. be done. Therefore, it takes about 2 seconds to eject 10 balls.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

In the first operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the first inter-round interval time Int1, it is possible to create a state in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round. Therefore, since the specified number of pachinko balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls) can be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a even after the second round, the maximum length of the first operating time T1 of each round is The round game R can be ended without waiting for 30 seconds. Therefore, the round game R can be progressed quickly.

Thereafter, in the same manner, the third to maximum 15th round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid 1510 so that a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

The second inter-round interval time Int2 is set as a time during which at least some of the balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and each ball is discharged at an interval of about 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of balls stored. be done. Therefore, the number of balls that can be ejected in one second is 5 balls, so for example, if 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are ejected at the second interval time Int2 between rounds. , five balls will still remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

In the second operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the second inter-round interval time Int2, it is possible to create a state in which the balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round. Therefore, from the second round onwards, a situation may arise in which the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) cannot be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R will be delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

Thereafter, the 3rd to 15th rounds of round games R are repeated with the second inter-round interval time Int2 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Here, the elapsed time and number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game will be compared. The balls can be fired at minimum intervals of 0.6 seconds.

First, when playing a jackpot game with the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. Adding the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( =OP(10s)+(T1(6s)+Int1(2s))×15R+ED(11s)). Also, the number of payouts is 2250 (=15×10C×15R).

On the other hand, when playing a jackpot game with the second operation pattern, 10 balls can be won in the first special winning hole 1000a in the first round, but only 5 balls can be won in each after the second round. The time that passes from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (=OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) x 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s)+ED(11s)). Further, the number of payouts is 1200 (=(10C×1R+5C×14R)×15) since only up to 5 balls can be won in the round game R from the second round onwards.

Therefore, when playing a jackpot game with the second operation pattern, it takes more than three times as long as when playing a jackpot game with the first operation pattern, but the number of balls that are paid out is about half, making the time efficiency of acquiring balls. becomes dramatically worse.

Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing a jackpot game using the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rarity value of jackpot A and jackpot a, improve attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot, and improve interest in the jackpot game.

Note that although the inter-round second interval time Int2 is set to 1.0 seconds, it is not limited to this, and can be set to various values, and can be changed in each round.

For example, the second inter-round interval time Int2 after the end of the round game R of the first round is 0.5 seconds, and the second inter-round interval time Int2 after the end of the round game R of the second round is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to do this.

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. If 10 balls are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of that round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning hole 1000a, so the number of balls to be paid out is also small (30 balls).

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, so for example, 10 balls were discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If three balls are stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of that round, it is possible to win 7 balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and it is possible to expect a certain number of balls (105 balls) to be paid out.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set the length of the second inter-round interval time Int2 to 2.0 seconds (or more). In this case, there are no balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the immediately following round game R, and it is possible to win 10 balls into the first specific prize opening 1000a, so a large number of prizes (150 balls) can be won. It is possible to hope for a reduction in the playing time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 activates the solenoid 1510 so that a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

By discharging the balls during the first inter-round interval time Int1, a state is created in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the second round round game R, so that from the second round onwards, the prescribed number of balls will be maintained. (In this embodiment, 10 pachinko balls) can be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the corresponding number of balls can be paid out, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, while the round game R is progressing quickly, prize balls can be paid out in the same way as in the first operation pattern.

Thereafter, the 3rd to 10th rounds of round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the 10th round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the 11th round game R is started.

In the 11th round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with the timer means and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the 11th round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the 11th round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, the 12th to 15th rounds of round games R are repeated with the second inter-round interval time Int2 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

By discharging the balls during the second inter-round interval time Int2, it is possible to create a state in which the balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R after the 11th round. Therefore, after the 11th round, a situation may arise in which the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) cannot be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R will be delayed compared to the first operation pattern.

Further, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game also becomes smaller compared to the number up to the 10th round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 pieces = (10C x 10R + 5C x 5R) x 15 pieces), and the degree of payouts (number of pieces, speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. , it can be changed depending on the number of rounds of the round game (depending on the timing).

Note that in the third operation pattern, a case has been described in which a large number of pieces are paid out in the beginning of the round, and the number of pieces paid out decreases toward the end of the round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of pieces paid out may be small at the beginning, but increase as it approaches the final stage, or the number of pieces paid out may peak in the middle of the round.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

According to this operation pattern, by changing the degree of payout (number of pieces, speed, etc.) in a jackpot game depending on which round of round game R is played, the jackpot game is given speed and speed, and the player's interest is improved. can be done.

In addition, when playing a jackpot game with the third operation pattern, there is no change from the first operation pattern until the 10th round, round game R, so the player can pay out the expected payout with the first operation pattern. It is possible to play a jackpot game with the expectation that the number of pieces can be obtained.

Further, the second inter-round interval time Int2, which is set to 1 second in this embodiment, can be set to any numerical value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in a certain jackpot type, the second inter-round interval time Int2 of the third operation pattern is all set to 1.5 seconds, and in another jackpot type, the second inter-round interval time Int2 of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds. Settings can be made in advance, such as setting the interval time Int2 to 0.5 seconds in odd-numbered rounds and 1.0 seconds in even-numbered rounds.

That is, by further subdividing the jackpot types, it is possible to form various jackpot games with different inter-round second interval times Int2. Therefore, from the 11th round onward, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the end of the jackpot game, and attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, the change in the payout level may be made to correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when playing a jackpot game using the third operation pattern, the image of a running character is displayed on the LCD screen, and during the first round when the character has stamina remaining, the display The character being played runs well, and in conjunction with this, many prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the character's stamina runs out (in the final round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and begins to walk, and the payout of prize balls decreases accordingly.

In this way, by making the payout level of the prize ball correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to empathize with the liquid crystal effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

Furthermore, by playing the jackpot game in the second operating pattern or the third operating pattern described above, each round can proceed based on the maximum value of the first operating time T1. It is possible to proceed over a period of time longer than the production time. In other words, for example, if the ball enters the first specific winning hole 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, the ball may be displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during a jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a jackpot game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of a moving image that is loop-reproduced over a predetermined presentation time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the player has finished viewing the performance during the jackpot.

Note that the effects displayed on the liquid crystal screen when playing the jackpot game in the second or third operation pattern are not limited. For example, in a mode where cheering messages from characters (such as "Good luck next time") are displayed, settings can be made such that the longer the jackpot game is played, the easier it is for cheering messages from characters with a lower appearance rate to be displayed. Therefore, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be played without stressing the player (rather, making him happy).

On the other hand, it may be displayed in a manner that gives more stress to the player. For example, a case will be explained in which a running character is displayed during a jackpot game, and at the same time, the character is displayed resting in a rest area during the interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, there is an interval between rounds every time a specified number of balls are won, so the character can complete the race without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second or third operation pattern, the stipulated number of prizes will not be won and the interval between rounds will not occur unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is reached. Therefore, it is possible to perform a production in which fatigue accumulates without causing any deviation from the game mode (in a production mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the intervals between rounds are short in the first place, it is possible to perform a production in which fatigue accumulates. You can create a scene where you have no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player see the exhausted character and give stress to the player, thereby increasing the player's ambition to recover by winning the next jackpot.

Furthermore, in the case where a similar display is performed, the character may replenish water in accordance with the timing of winning a prize. In this case, while the first operation pattern allows sufficient hydration, from the 11th round onwards in the second or third operation pattern, the number of times of replenishment (number of prizes won) is lower than the first. As the amount of water decreases compared to the operating pattern, and the period during which the character runs (the period of the jackpot game) becomes longer, the amount of water that can be replenished is insufficient compared to the sweat generated by the character, and the character becomes more and more fatigued. It is possible to carry out various presentations without causing any deviation from the game mode (in a presentation mode in which the time is controlled in advance, regardless of the winning mode). As a result, it is possible to correlate the state of the character with the profit that the player obtains (payout balls including time efficiency), and to determine how big a jackpot the player has won (whether it is a medium hit or not). , whether it is a jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily made known to the player through the performance of the entire jackpot game.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed, but in the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, the number of balls that can be stored inside is fixed. It is configured such that the number of items can be changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In addition, in FIG. 24, when a ball enters from the 2nd specific winning a prize opening 2255a, the arrangement|positioning of the ball stored in a part of storage channel 1231 and the 2nd storage channel 2251 is illustrated by the hidden line.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a drive device 1500 similar to those in the first embodiment, and a main body member slightly different from the first embodiment. 2100, a covering front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and further includes a second variable winning device 2800 newly introduced in the second embodiment. In addition, the second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable layer entry device 2800 is provided with a second specific prize opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout during a jackpot game passes.

The second specific winning hole 2255a is a winning hole having the same function as the first specific winning hole 1000a. That is, when a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning hole 1000a or the second specific winning hole 2255a, which is normally closed, closes for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed). (or until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although the details will be described later, the opening operation is possible in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a, so a larger amount of winning balls than usual are paid out.

The main body member 2100 has the following features in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (thin plate member 1110, accommodation section 1120, holding hole 1130, protruding section 1140, discharge port 1150, rotation support section 1160, and support claw section 1170). , a slide guide hole 2181, which is a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182, which is also a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110, and into which the second detection sensor 2255 can be inserted. , a drive guide rib 2183 having a pair of walls parallel to each other along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and extending linearly in the left-right direction; It mainly includes a transmission guide rib 2184 whose walls are arranged in parallel and extends linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft part 2185 which pivotally supports the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800.

The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 disposed on the covering front plate 2200 is inserted.

Each rib 2183, 2184 is a rib that guides the sliding operation of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable prize winning device 2800 is driven.

The covering front plate 2200 has the same configuration as the covering front plate 1200 of the first embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall part 1220, housing part 1230, and detection sensor 1240), and is connected to the upper right direction of the housing part 1230. A second storage section 2250 is provided.

The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of a thin plate formed in a plane with the thin plate member 1210, and has an upward opening and a second accommodating portion 2250 whose terminal end is connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. Storage channel 2251 and a second detection disposed in the second storage channel 2251 with the opening aligned in the extending direction of the second storage channel 2251 near the upper end of the second storage channel 2251 The sensor 2255 and the left side portion of the opening of the second storage flow path 2251 when viewed from the front are closed between the front plate of the second accommodating portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100, and the upper surface is inclined downwardly toward the left. It mainly includes an inclined surface 2257.

In the second storage flow path 2251, when the discharge port 1150 is closed and the balls are stored when the balls pass through the second detection sensor 2255 and are stored inside the second storage section 2250, the number of stored balls is It is configured to have a maximum of 14 pieces.

The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has a second specific winning opening 2255a and produces the same effect as the detection sensor 1240. That is, when the ball enters the accommodation section 1230 by switching the opening/closing plate 1300, the detection sensor 1240 detects the ball, and by switching the second variable winning device 2800, the ball enters the accommodation section via the second accommodation section 2250. 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects the ball.

The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening/closing plate 1300 is disposed. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the slope 2257 and head toward the channel forming section on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. Ru. Therefore, during a jackpot game, the player can open either specific winning opening 1000a or 2255a, regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open. In this case, by playing a right-handed game, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Therefore, even an inexperienced player can easily play the game.

Note that the second detection sensor 2255 is arranged inside the second storage flow path 2251 with enough room for one ball to be placed on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing when the remaining one ball reaches the specified number by passing through the second detection sensor 2255), a plurality of balls flow into the second storage channel 2251 in succession. , the structure is such that more than a specified number of balls can enter the ball.

In addition to the configuration of the regulating member 1600 of the first embodiment (shaft portion 1610, extension portion 1620, and ball receiving portion 1630), the restriction member 2600 has the shaft portion 1610 further extended to the left, and has an extension portion 1620. The second extending portion 2640 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction.

The second extending portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load during operation of the second variable prize winning device 2800, as will be described later. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 is able to control the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening/closing plate 1300 whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs the switching operation or the opening/closing plate 1300 performs the switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of .

The second variable winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left and right direction by the drive of the solenoid 2810, and a tip member 2820 with one end supported by the tip member 2820, a transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by a shaft portion 2185; a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and extending from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100; A rod-shaped intervening rod portion 2850 having one end fixed to the member 2820 and slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183; and a transmission guide rib having one end disposed at a position where it can come into contact with the intervening rod portion 2850. It mainly includes a transmission rod part 2860 that extends along the inside of the regulating member 2184 and has the other end arranged in a position where it can come into contact with the second extending part 2640 of the regulating member 2600.

The intervening rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide rib 2183, while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-back direction. In this embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured in such a manner that the longer the separation distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100, the closer the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are to each other (the closer the distance between them is), the more the intervening rod portion 2850 Movement in the front and rear directions is restricted.

The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184, while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In this embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured in such a manner that the longer the distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 is, the closer the transmission guide ribs 2184 are to each other (the interval between them is narrower). Movement in the front and rear directions is restricted.

Note that the surfaces of the end portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. Thereby, force can be smoothly transmitted from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 2000 taken along line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has an opposing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 having a curved arc shape in cross section, and the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has a curved cross section. The biasing force of a biasing torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the opposing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

In the states shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable prize winning device 2800 for making it possible for a ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 will be explained.

27(a) to 27(c), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) are partial rear views of the first variable prize winning device 2000. In addition, in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c), in order to facilitate understanding, illustrations of configurations unnecessary for the explanation are omitted, and the state change of the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state is omitted. The process is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 27(a), the solenoid 2810 is de-energized and the tip member 2820 is disposed at the farthest position from the solenoid 2810, while in FIG. 27(b), the solenoid 2810 is immediately after being energized. In FIG. 27(c), the tip member 2820 is placed in the middle position of the movement range, and the tip member 2820 is placed in the state where it is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (the final position when the solenoid 2810 is energized). The respective states are shown in the figure. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 27(a), the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. 27(c), the slide plate 2840 , constitutes an open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, the regulating member 2600 is in the ejected state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in a de-energized state, the action of the second variable prize winning device 2800 can prevent the regulating member 2600 from entering the storage state. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in this embodiment, a control mode in which the solenoid 2810 is not operated (maintained in a non-energized state) (for example, the control mode in the first embodiment) Accordingly, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

In addition, if a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable prize winning device 2000 by switching to the state shown in FIG. 27(a).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the solenoid 2810 is energized, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 to begin to be displaced via the transmission member 2830, and the transmission rod portion 2860 to begin to be displaced via the intervening rod portion 2850. do. Here, in this embodiment, the abutting portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are arranged close to each other, although they are slightly separated in the state of FIG. The operation of rod portion 2860 begins almost simultaneously.

When the transmission rod section 2860 is pushed down by the end of the intervening rod section 2850, the lower end of the transmission rod section 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extending section 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is pushed down a little and placed in a state halfway between the discharge state and the storage state.

As shown in FIG. 27(c), when the tip member 2830 has completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the terminal position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27(c), the intervening rod portion 2850 slides to such an extent that the inclined surface faces the transmission rod portion 2860 and passes through the transmission rod portion 2860. The load applied toward the intervening member 2850 can be applied in a direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of the intervening member 2850.

This can prevent the load applied to the intervening member 2850 from varying along the moving direction of the intervening member 2850 due to the variation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. It is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 from fluctuating, and therefore, drive the solenoid 2810 to maintain the slide plate 2840 in the open state, which changes state due to the displacement of the tip member 2820. It is possible to prevent the force from fluctuating. Thereby, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is directly used as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860 to change the state of the regulating member 2600. Therefore, the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. This makes it possible to finely adjust the state change timing of the regulating member 2600, so it is possible to suppress the deviation between the control value of the number of pieces to be ejected specified for each interval time between rounds in a jackpot game and the actual number of pieces to be ejected, The number of discharged pieces can be stabilized.

FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27(c). As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the opposing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown) that biases the regulating member 2600 toward the disposed position in the ejected state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

Therefore, when the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27(c)) to the closed state (see FIG. 27(a)) and the restriction by the intervening rod portion 2850 is released, the biasing force of the torsion spring As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27(a)).

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol in this embodiment.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in this embodiment is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is It is defined in association with the type and the type of ball entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

In addition, the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64) is as follows. Since it is the same as that explained in the first embodiment, the explanation will be omitted, and below, in this embodiment, the case where a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) will be described. explain.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". is defined in association with jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot d is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 2,250 prize balls plus a limited increase.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "30 to 99", and the jackpot e is defined in association with it (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

In the case of a jackpot e, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player will be 2,250 prize balls plus the limited amount of increase, but the difficulty level of increasing the number of balls to be paid out is higher than that of the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing of increasing the number of pieces to be paid out, the time required for the jackpot game will be much longer than that in the case of jackpot d.

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes depending on the type of jackpot. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, it is possible to keep the number of jackpot rounds unchanged while making a difference in the number of payouts and to change the time required for the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, in the case of jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the first to seventh rounds). If more than a specified number of balls are entered into the first variable winning device 2000, the extra payout will be deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (8th round round game R) and the progress of the 8th round will be deducted. It is configured to take the maximum amount of time. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the player can win the increased amount of balls paid out by entering more than the specified number of balls into the first variable winning device 2000 without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

In this case, in the case of jackpot e, the gaming method that allows the player to obtain the highest profit, including time efficiency, is to limit winnings to the specified number of prizes until the 8th round, and play round games R from the 9th round onwards. The aim is to increase the number of prizes paid out with the aim of winning more than the specified number of prizes. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put more than a prescribed number of balls into the first variable winning device 2000, depending on which round of the round game R, and the player's attention to the jackpot game. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the 1 specific winning a prize hole 1000a and the 2nd specific winning a prize hole 2255a.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state and open the second specific winning opening 2255a. This causes the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning position is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the first round round game R ends, the timer means operates the solenoids 1510, 2810 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed. is driven and controlled, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is made to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

The first inter-round interval time Int1 is set as the time for ejecting 10 balls from the ejection port 1150, as described above in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning hole 2255a, it is possible to enter more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) into the second specific winning hole 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls ejected from the ejection port 1150 due to the first inter-round interval time Int1 is 10, more than 10 balls enter the second specific winning port 2255a in each round game R. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of stored balls when entering from the second storage channel 2251 side is 14, so in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of winning balls exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. The number is limited to four throughout the jackpot game. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts above the specified number (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be obtained by a player who plays a jackpot game with jackpot d can be limited to 60 pieces (=15 pieces x 4C). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of pieces to be paid out from greatly changing due to differences in the game mode (timing of hitting, interval between hitting, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows players to enjoy profits fairly, regardless of the player's experience level.

Thereafter, the 3rd round to the 15th round at most are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the slide board 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state and open the second specific winning opening 2255a. This causes the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning position is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is made to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

The first inter-round interval time Int1 is set as the time for ejecting 10 balls from the ejection port 1150, as described above in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning hole 2255a, it is possible to enter more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) into the second specific winning hole 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls ejected from the ejection port 1150 due to the first inter-round interval time Int1 is 10, more than 10 balls enter the second specific winning port 2255a in each round game R. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

Thereafter, the third to seventh round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the seventh round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, and the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed. After the elapse of , the 8th round of the round game R is started.

In the 8th round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the 8th round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eighth round of the round game R ends.

Here, in the round game R before the 7th round, if the number of balls exceeding the specified number has passed through the second specific winning hole 2255a, at the start of the round game R of the 8th round, the number of balls exceeding the specified number Since the balls remain in the storage channel 1231, in the round game R of the 8th round, it is only possible to win the number of balls obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number of balls exceeding the specified number by the 7th round) from the specified number. Since this is not possible, the payout of prize balls including the 8th round is equalized to the prescribed number of prize balls up to the 8th round. In addition, in the round game R of the 8th round, it is not possible to win the specified number of pachinko balls, so the next round must be played after waiting for 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Let's move on to games.

As a result, the player suffers emotional damage as the extra prize balls that were paid out up to the 7th round are lost, and time damage as the round game R in the 8th round becomes longer than necessary. will receive. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game carefully so as not to win more than the specified number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of winning balls exceeding the specified number, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

In addition, if there is no winning exceeding the specified number by the 7th round, the specified number of balls can be passed through one specific prize opening 1000a in the round game R of the 8th round, and the specified number of balls will be paid out. In addition, the eighth round of the round game R can be completed without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, while the round game R is progressing quickly, the prescribed number of prize balls can be paid out.

Therefore, in the jackpot game with jackpot e, it is to the player's benefit to intentionally suppress winnings exceeding the specified number until the seventh round. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's attentiveness during the game up to the seventh round.

In addition, when the jackpot game R of the 8th round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 elapses, and the first inter-round interval time Int1 is elapsed. After the time Int1 has elapsed, the ninth round of the round game R is started. Incidentally, at the start of the ninth round, the round game R, it is possible to make a state in which no balls remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the 9th round, the solenoid 2810 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific prize opening 2255a. is driven and controlled to cause the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the 9th round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the ninth round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, similarly, the 10th to 15th round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In the round game R from the 9th round onwards, the opening/closing plate 1300 does not open/close, so the prize balls paid out by the balls that exceed the specified number and enter the second specific winning slot 2255a from the 9th round onwards are , can be received by the player without deduction.

Therefore, when playing a jackpot game with jackpot e, the number of winnings in the second specific winning slot 2255a that exceeds the specified number is suppressed in jackpot game R until the 7th round, and in jackpot game R after the 9th round, Aiming to win a prize in the second specific prize opening 2255a that exceeds the number of prizes is a gaming method that allows the player to obtain the largest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

That is, in the round game R of each round, by putting balls in excess of the specified number into the second specific winning hole 2255a, the player may gain a profit or suffer a loss. As a result, it is possible to provide different gameplay characteristics to each round of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the attentiveness of the player who plays the jackpot game (it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game without thinking). .

In addition, according to this operation pattern, the rounds in which the player can receive additional prize balls by placing balls exceeding the specified number into the second special winning hole 2255a are substantially performed after the ninth round. can be restricted. Thereby, it is possible to narrow the timing at which the number of balls to be paid out changes due to differences in game modes (timing of hitting, interval between hitting, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the number of balls being paid out from changing significantly. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows players to enjoy profits fairly, regardless of the player's experience level.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls that reach the flow path forming part when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and flow down to the downstream of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state fall as they are, but in the third embodiment The first variable winning device 3000 is configured to delay the fall of the balls when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and to allow some of the balls to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the installation front board 3200.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, a regulating member 1600, and a rear cover 1700 similar to the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a covered front plate 3200 are provided, which are slightly different from the first embodiment. Note that FIG. 32 shows the open/close plate 1300 in a closed state.

The main body member 3100 has the following features in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the housing part 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding part 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support part 1160, and the support claw part 1170). , an additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner continuous to the left side wall of the covered front plate 3200 in front view on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and an additional winning opening 3181 directed upward from the left side wall part of the additional winning opening 3181 in front view. It mainly includes a curved extension plate 3182 that extends in a curved manner.

The additional winning hole 3181 is a ball entrance that discharges the balls flowing down the gaming area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and when balls enter the additional winning hole 3181, the maximum number of balls is 15. The given number of prize balls will be paid out. In this embodiment, the setting is such that 11 balls are paid out.

The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts the passage of the ball flowing down the game area by making the gap in the vertical direction in the game area less than or equal to the diameter of the ball, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. . Further, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed in a shape that slopes downward as it goes from the mid-abdomen toward the left in front view, and slopes downward as it goes from the mid-abdomen toward the right in front view.

The covering front plate 3200 has the same structure as the covering front plate 1200 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall part 1220, the housing part 1230, and the detection sensor 1240), as well as the structure between the side wall part 1220 and the housing part 1230. A fall delay plate 3250 is provided that extends from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface side in the region.

The fall delay plate 3250 is arranged on the front side of the movement trajectory of the opening/closing plate 1300 to avoid interference with the opening/closing plate 3250, and is a linear plate arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 and parallel to the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 that is a shaped portion and extends perpendicularly from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and a curved shape that connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 and has a concave upper surface. It mainly includes a rolling arc portion 3252 formed.

The fall delay plate 3250 has an elongated shape from side to side, and decelerates the ball so that it takes approximately 2 seconds or more for the ball to travel down a distance of half the length of the plate (including bouncing and falling due to rolling). It is formed from the shape. Note that the opening/closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that when a ball flows down a distance that is half the length of the plate in the left-right direction, it flows down in one second or less.

As shown in FIG. 32, the extension plate portion 3251 is a surface facing the main body member 3100, and is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. It includes an opposing surface 3251a, and a terminal surface 3251b, which is a surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the accommodating portion 1230 and is formed with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere between the accommodating portion 1230 and the accommodating portion 1230.

The distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is the radius of the ball at the portion located vertically below the center of the ball when the ball is located at the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). At the intermediate position (midway position in the left-right direction in Figure 32), the radius is switched to be greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere, and in the part located vertically below the center of the sphere when placed on the most downstream side (right side in Figure 32). It is assumed to be greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the opposing surface 3251a runs along the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects with the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 3200. (The tangent line drawn on the plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covering front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the upstream position Pf1, which is the most upstream side, to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls and is spaced to the right from the rolling arc portion 3252, is connected to the downstream position Pf2. It passes through and flows down.

In this embodiment, since the distance from the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 to the facing surface 3251a of the extending plate portion 3250 is less than the diameter of the ball, the distance until the ball reaches the falling position Pf3 is , the ball is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the ball does not fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 until it reaches the falling position Pf3. The manner in which the ball flows down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described below.

34(a) to 34(c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. 31. Note that FIG. 34(b) shows a ball placed at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34(c) shows a ball placed at the downstream position Pf2. Note that in FIG. 34, illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b) and 34(c), the ball rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 rolls in the front-rear direction on the rolling arc portion 3252 and comes into contact with the plate portion 1310. As the ball flows down, the radial length of the ball to the contact portion with the fall delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the ball when viewed in the axial direction) is shortened as the ball flows down.

That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34(b), the radial length r1 up to the part where the ball contacts the fall delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the ball. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34(c), the radial length r2 up to the part where the ball contacts the fall delay plate 3250 is made shorter than the radius of the ball.

These radial lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of rotation of the sphere when the sphere rotates about the axis along the front-rear direction. In other words, if the rotational speed of the ball is the same, the shorter the diameter lengths r1 and r2, the lower the rolling speed of the ball (the ball is delayed). According to this embodiment, the opposing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases as it goes downstream. Therefore, the radius of rotation of the ball is gradually shortened as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Furthermore, in FIG. 34 showing the axial direction of the extending plate portion 3251 extending along the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate 1300, the state shown in FIG. 34(c) is different from the state shown in FIG. ), the ball is displaced downward. That is, the more the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the more the ball can be moved away from the first specific winning opening 1000a, so the ball flowing down the falling delay plate 3250 can be deflected from the first specific winning opening 1000a. can.

As a result, even if the ball entry prevention part 1331 is not formed in the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream end, and directs the ball toward the first specific prize opening 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player wins a prize by flying with the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a case will be described in which the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward to the open state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250. 35(a) and 35(b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35(c) shows the first variable winning device 3000 along the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). FIG. Note that FIG. 35(a) shows the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300, FIGS. 35(b) and 35(c) show the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, and FIG. 35(c) shows the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state. The outer shapes of the plate portion 1310 and the ball in the closed state are illustrated with imaginary lines, and illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), an example of a ball that has entered the flow path forming part of the first variable prize winning device 3000 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that lands on the top surface of the fall delay plate 3250 moves to the right in the front view along the extending direction of the extending plate part 3251. If the opening/closing plate 1300 continues to remain closed, it will fall after reaching the falling position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the effect of the above-mentioned extension plate part 3251, and the rolling time of the ball can be maintained for a long time, and the attention to the ball can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), when the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward (rotating movement) towards the open state while the ball is rolling, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate part 1310 will roll. It moves upward smoothly along the arc shape of the moving arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent to the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the part where the ball comes into contact when the ball starts moving is oriented in the front-rear direction, it is possible to smooth the movement of the ball when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating. can.

The flow direction when the ball moves upward, rolls on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311, and flows down is parallel to the flow direction shown in FIG. 35(a). Therefore, compared to the case where the downward direction of the ball changes to completely different directions before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, it is possible to alleviate the discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the movement of the ball before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300. can.

In this way, from the state in which the ball is placed below the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35(c)), the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward, thereby changing the ball to the open state. By being pushed back (flowing backwards) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, it becomes possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the ball, which is placed below the opening/closing plate 1300 and has once become impossible to win into the first specific winning opening 1000a, is made into a state where it is possible to win into the first specific winning opening 1000a by upward movement. Since the game can be returned to the original position, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In other words, in both FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the state in which the ball is placed upstream of the detection sensor 1240 is illustrated because there is still a possibility that the ball will pass through the detection sensor 1240. I can say that it is. That is, the effect of the fall delay plate 3250 allows the ball to continue to be maintained upstream of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state.

In addition, even if it becomes impossible to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the top surface of the fall delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that he may win a prize in the first specific winning hole 1000a, and it is possible to maintain the player's attention.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening/closing plate 1300 forms a closed state, the falling of the ball that reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 is delayed, and then when the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring the ball to be able to be revived above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that arrives in front of the opening/closing board 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific prize opening 1000a in the next round game. Therefore, the number of balls that pass through the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and enter the first out port 66 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the opening of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be prevented from being obstructed due to the ball being disposed on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. In other words, in a conventional game machine where the ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening/closing plate, the movement of the opening/closing plate causes the ball to be caught between the opening/closing plate and the glass plate, which causes the ball to open and close. There was a problem in that the opening of the board was obstructed and there was a risk that the player would suffer a loss.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 in front of the opening/closing plate 1300, the distance between the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained (limited) almost constant. can do. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely, the ball is caught between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the glass plate, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 will be hindered can be reduced. In addition, in this embodiment, the ball is placed slightly above the position where the ball may be caught between the glass plate and the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 may be hindered while the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the open state. The fall delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the ball is maintained at the position.

FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) are schematic diagrams showing the downward flow of the ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 36(a), the falling state of two balls that have reached the first variable prize winning device 3000 when the balls are left to hit is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 36(b), for example, By performing a special hitting method (so-called "twisting hit") in which the ball is hit weakly and the second ball is hit hard, the two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 in succession. The flow pattern is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), when the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 arrive at the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 with a predetermined distance from each other by leaving the ball alone, When P1 enters the first specific winning opening 1000a and the opening/closing board 1300 is switched to the closed state, the ball P2 can still be placed on the upstream side of the fall delay board 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time for the ball P2 to completely flow down the fall delay plate 3250, making it easier to maintain the ball on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. I can do it.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when two balls reach the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, the opening/closing plate 1300 closes as the ball P1 enters the first specific winning hole 1000a. Since the ball P2 is placed near the position immediately in front of the detection sensor 1240 (falling position Pf3), the ball P2 cannot wait until the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state next time, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from the plate 3250.

In this way, in this embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down in a row due to a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down with a predetermined interval apart due to a normal hitting method is This makes it easier to receive the effect of the fall delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front of the opening/closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds to a state where the ball can enter the first specific prize opening 1000a). Thereby, it is possible to suppress games using special hitting methods such as twisting.

FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable prize winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, a state immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state is illustrated, and a ball bouncing upward by colliding with the opening/closing plate 1300 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, when the ball lands on the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state, the bounce as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball landing on the opening/closing plate 1300 is bounced back while the opening/closing plate 1300 is moving upward. Only then, the ball bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

The way the bouncing ball flows down after that is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 again, or entering the additional prize opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. be done. Therefore, the player can receive a prize ball due to the bouncing ball. Therefore, a ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the middle of switching to the open state ends up entering the first out port 66, preventing the player from making a profit. It can be prevented.

In addition, even if a ball enters the additional winning hole 3181, a prescribed number of balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls) can be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a. The payout due to winning in the opening 3181 becomes a prize ball (additional profit) that is paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the middle of switching to the open state, it is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained by the player. It is possible to improve the ability to pay attention to the ball flowing down.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a variable probability state (high probability state) of a special symbol is provided as an added value after a jackpot, regardless of the difference in the falling state of the ball that enters the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable prize winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment includes a probability fluctuation determination unit that makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) based on a difference in the falling manner of the ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable prize winning device 4000 is shown enlarged. As shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, a transparent window is formed on the game board 13 in the lower part of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and a probability change window is provided on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covered front plate 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulating member 1600 and a rear cover 1700), and further includes a probability fluctuation determining section 4800 newly introduced in the fourth embodiment.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 includes a communication path 4810, which is a flow path through which the balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 flow and extends vertically downward, and a flow branched into two that communicates with the lower end of the communication path 4810. A probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 that is a flow path, a specific region 4830 that is arranged in communication with a flow path on the left side of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 when viewed from the front, and a specific region 4830 that is placed in communication with a flow path on the right side of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820 when viewed from the front. A non-specific area 4840, a sorting device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with game balls at a branch of the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 that detects passage of a game ball in a specific area 4830, It mainly includes a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540.

The communication path 4810 is formed to have a length that allows approximately one second to elapse for a ball entering from the outlet to reach the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820.

The sorting device 4850 is disposed to protrude inside the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and has an open position where the ball flows down to a specific area 4830 (forming an open state) and an open position where the ball flows down to a non-specific area 4840 (forming a closed state). It mainly includes a distribution operation member 4851 that can be operated between a closed position (forming) and a closed position, and a solenoid 4852 that drives the distribution operation member 4851.

The probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding the acquisition of the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) only in the special round (the fifth round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. In the special round, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a period of time that allows the game ball to pass through. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state). In this embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability variable state of the special symbol), for example, 40 It is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/1.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. The configuration is such that the state is set to normal after the end.

In this embodiment, five types of special symbols are provided as jackpot types: "jackpot D", "jackpot E", "jackpot F", "jackpot G", and "jackpot f" (see FIG. 40). Details will be described later, but depending on the type of jackpot, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the operating pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000 and the operating pattern of the distribution device 4850 are different depending on the jackpot type. It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to transition to a variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponds to each jackpot type and special It is defined in association with the type of ball entrance that triggered the drawing of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". is defined in association with jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot D, a five-round jackpot game is executed using the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "30 to 49" is associated with and defined as the jackpot E (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot E is reached, a 5-round jackpot game is executed using the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 675 prize balls, and can only rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 79", and the jackpot F is defined in association with it (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot F, a five-round jackpot game is executed using the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

A jackpot G is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 99" (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot G, a five-round jackpot game is executed using the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 750 prize balls, and can only rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

As mentioned above, in the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), there is a 50% probability that the special symbol will have the right to transition to the variable state (high probability state). can be obtained with certainty. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, it is possible to occasionally acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 94", The jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot f is reached, similarly to the jackpot D, a five-round jackpot game is executed using the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "95 to 99" is defined in association with the jackpot g (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot g, a 5-round jackpot game is executed using the 10th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 600 prize balls, and can also occasionally acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

As mentioned above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), there is a 95% probability that the first variable prize winning device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 will select the sixth It operates according to the operating pattern. At this time, you can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state), so in the lottery of special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball opening 64). This is more advantageous for the player than in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, in order to win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the player must play the right-handed game when the special symbol is in a variable probability state (high probability state). conduct.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the variation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer when the regular symbol hits (1 seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640, so it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can make the transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, it is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbol, and if it becomes a jackpot, it will almost certainly be a transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Since the state of changing probability of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot in which the player can obtain the right to win is more likely to be repeated, it becomes easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operating pattern, and FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning opening in the seventh operating pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830 over time.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the 6th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes a timer means (not shown) to close the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled so as to be held, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

When the round game R of the second round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the third round round game R is started.

In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the third round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls), The third round of the round game R is completed by driving and controlling the solenoid 1510 to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the third round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of other rounds, a timer starts measuring the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the mouth 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time is set. After OP3 has elapsed, the solenoid moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.1 seconds), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is held in the closed state again. 4852 is driven and controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. This predetermined time is set as a time during which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a prescribed number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning hole 1000a. That is, in this embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time of 0.6 seconds at the fastest, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, by normal estimation, only about 5 balls can be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the fourth round of the round game R ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, thereby suppressing the sense of discomfort given to the player due to the shorter duration of the 4th round round game R than other rounds. can do.

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

At the second opening time OP2, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of balls stored is up to 6), all the discharged balls are sent to the probability fluctuation determination channel 4822. On the other hand, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of balls stored is 7 or more), at least one of the balls discharged The time is set to be shorter than the time required for the ball to completely pass through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

In this embodiment, the fourth round of the round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so even if the fourth round of the round game ends at the second operation time T2, The number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can easily be seven or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, the remaining ball can be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Here, unlike the prior art, in this operation pattern, there is no need to close the opening/closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before operating in the fifth round of the round game R. , the opening/closing plate 1300 can be operated without any discomfort. This will be explained below.

In the prior art, if the round game R ends with a prescribed number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a before the distribution operation member 4581 starts operating, the distribution operation member 4851 is in an open state. This is because there is a risk that a problem may occur in which the player is unable to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a even though the player is in the game, and the player is unable to obtain the right to change the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state). In order to prevent this, it was necessary to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state while the distribution operation member 4851 was in the closed state before operation (it was opened twice within one round).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game feature is to switch whether or not the ball that won the first specific winning hole 1000a can enter the specific area 4830 in the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. , Even if a ball cannot enter the first specific prize opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before operation, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. Since the ball heading towards the specific area 4830 has already won in the first variable winning device 4000, the player can obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) without any problem.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before operation in the fifth round of the round game R, the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 is controlled by opening the opening and closing plate 1300. While preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it also prevents the occurrence of a problem in which the player is unable to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the variable state (high probability state) depending on the winning mode. can do.

In addition, since the ball that won the first specific winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round remains in the storage channel 1231 during the first operation time T1, the ball that won the first prize in the round game R of the fifth round is It is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. As a result, the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) by winning the first specific winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the 5th round (special round). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as changes in whether or not it is possible.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. It should be noted that the process up to the end of the third round round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, so the explanation will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as the sixth operation pattern.

When the third round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fourth round round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of other rounds, a timer starts measuring the second operating time T2 (maximum 3 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the mouth 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time is set. After OP3 has elapsed, the solenoid moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.1 seconds), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distribution operation member 4851 is held in the closed state again. 4852 is driven and controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a prescribed number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning hole 1000a. That is, in this embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time of 0.6 seconds at the fastest, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, by normal estimation, only about 5 balls can be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the fourth round of the round game R ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (all balls) are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with the approximately 5 winning balls that are possible in 3 seconds, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the balls that have won in 3 seconds remaining in the storage channel 1231. .

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, the number of balls ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round is about 5, so due to some rare cause, 8 or more balls are ejected from the first winning port in 3 seconds. 1000a, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced after all the ejected balls have passed through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, no ball remains in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and therefore the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In addition, in this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, the sixth operation pattern is also used in this operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in .

Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether balls can be stored until the storage channel 1231 is nearly full during the fourth round game R. In other words, depending on the difference in the accumulation of balls, it is possible to predict whether or not the player will be able to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state). You can improve your ability to pay attention to the ball. Thereby, attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls land in the round game R of the fourth round, you will almost certainly acquire the right to transition to the special symbol probability variable state (high probability state). However, since the time of the round game R is short, the more accustomed the player is to the game, the more likely he is to fail to acquire the right to transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the sixth operation pattern. A favorable situation is created.

That is, the less experienced the player is, the more likely he or she is to hit all balls during a jackpot game, whereas the more experienced the player is, the more likely he or she is to avoid hitting all balls and stop between rounds in order to avoid wasting balls between rounds during a jackpot game. This is the difference that arises from

To be more specific, in the case of a hit-and-run game, a plurality of balls are always flowing down near the opening/closing plate 1300, and immediately after the start of the round game R of the fourth round, the balls enter the first specific prize opening 1000a. Therefore, there is plenty of time for three or more balls to enter the ball in three seconds. Therefore, an inexperienced player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) without any problem.

On the other hand, if the ball is stopped between rounds to avoid the ball flowing down near the opening/closing plate 1300 during the interval period by starting the ball after the round game R of the fourth round has started, it is true that there will be no wasted balls. Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening/closing plate 1300 until a while (for example, 2 seconds) after the start of the fourth round round game R. Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state). Therefore, even a player who is accustomed to the game can be encouraged to hit the ball continuously during the jackpot game.

In this manner, the sixth operation pattern has the inherent possibility that the more experienced the player is, the less profit he or she can obtain due to the manner of launching. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is inexperienced or used to the game, it is possible to induce the player to play the game without hitting anything during the jackpot, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the profits obtained from the game.

On the other hand, for players who understand the above-mentioned risks and still decide to stop between rounds, it is possible to provide a jackpot game that requires concentration that cannot be experienced with other pachinko machines 10. . In other words, by performing a round stop shot in which the ball starts to be launched by counting backwards so that the ball flows into the first specific winning hole 1000a immediately after opening the first specific winning hole 1000a in the fourth round, the number of wasted balls can be reduced. At the same time, you can also acquire the right to transition to a variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In this case, the inter-round suspension is performed before the end of the third round round game R, and the launching is started before the end of the third round round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform sophisticated calculations such as starting the launch while predicting the timing of ball entry while also considering the randomness of the flow of the ball that enters during the round game R of the third round. Therefore, if the timing at which the ball that started hitting reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning hole 1000a is as calculated, the player's interest can be improved.

FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operating pattern, and FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning opening in the ninth operating pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830 over time.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the 8th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. It should be noted that the process up to the end of the third round round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

When the third round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, it is not possible to enter the specified number of balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a, so the round game R of the fourth round is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. It ends with the passage of time.

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. Note that this opening operation is performed at the same time as the opening operation after the third opening time OP3 has elapsed.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage If the number of balls is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time required for at least some of the balls to pass through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

In this operation pattern, the fourth round of the round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so the fourth round of the round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, if there are seven or more balls stored in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to open the distribution operation member 4851 with the balls remaining in the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820. can. Therefore, the remaining balls can be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In addition, in this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, the sixth operation pattern is also used in this operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in .

<When operating in the 9th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. It should be noted that the process up to the end of the third round round game R is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, so the explanation will be omitted. Further, the driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as the eighth operation pattern.

When the third round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fourth round round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled to be held in the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, it is not possible to enter the specified number of balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a, so the round game R of the fourth round is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. It ends with the passage of time.

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined period of time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it in the closed state again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage If the number of balls is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time required for at least some of the balls to pass through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

In this operation pattern, the fourth round of the round game R is started with no balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so in the fourth round of the round game R, a specified number of balls are entered into the first specific prize opening 1000a. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to end the fourth round of the round game R without waiting until the maximum value of the first operating time T1. However, in many cases, if the fourth round round game R is ended without waiting until the maximum value of the first operating time T1, as in the case where the fourth round round game R is ended by winning a specified number of prizes, Immediately after that, the distributing member 4851 is displaced after the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820.

On the other hand, if the distribution operation member 4851 finishes the fourth round of the round game R by waiting until the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the number of balls ejected in the interval immediately after that is 7 or more; The sphere can be caused to flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, instead of rushing to win the specified number of balls, the player can win the special symbol by placing the specified number of balls into the first special winning slot 1000a just before the end of the round game R of the 4th round. can acquire the right to transition to a variable state (high probability state).

In addition, as another method, by ending the round game R of the 5th round immediately after the 4th round at an appropriate timing, the balls ejected at the interval immediately after the round game R of the 5th round are placed in a specific area. By letting the special symbol flow down, the player can also acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

In this way, according to this operation pattern, the player can change the probability of the special symbol to the variable state (high probability state) at the player's discretion (selecting the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning hole 1000a, etc.). It is possible to make a difference as to whether or not transfer rights can be obtained.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round round game R is specified. When the activation time is specified (in the case of the 8th activation pattern), by continuing to enter the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a, the player can win the special symbol no matter how the game is played. Since it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state), the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, if the operating time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operating pattern), the player selects the operating time himself depending on the game mode (when to place the specified number of balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a). In some cases, it is possible to acquire the right to move the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) by selecting . Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on playing the round game R, improve his ability to pay attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player a feeling of exhilaration of achieving a variable state on his own. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

The characteristics of the sixth to ninth operating patterns are that the interval immediately after the third round round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round round game is played with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. When R is started, it is easy to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state). That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which it is easier to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the round game R of the third round is long enough to completely discharge the balls in the storage channel 1231, the right to transition to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol is granted. difficult to obtain. That is, when it is difficult to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state), it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the payout of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is increased. As a result, it is possible to prepare a larger number of balls for the player to hit in the normal state that will be continued later, making it easier to suppress the player's cash investment.

These differences can be ascertained by whether or not the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fourth round, so at the start of the round game R of the fourth round, the player can predict the state after the end of the jackpot game. can do. Even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to obtain the right to transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the right to transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol can be obtained depending on the manner in which the ball enters. It is possible to obtain.

Here, in this embodiment, by forcing the player to make a selection, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player during the jackpot game. In other words, the game mode in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) is the exact opposite.

To be more specific, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round of the round game R, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific prize opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. By winning a prize, the possibility of acquiring the right to change the special symbol to a variable state (high probability state) increases (there is an advantage to winning many balls from the start of the 4th round). In the case of operation pattern 9, in the fourth round of round game R, the period of round game R is extended by waiting for the specified number of balls to be won until just before the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. This increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state) (there is an advantage in suppressing the winning of balls at the start of the fourth round).

In this way, the possibility of acquiring the right to move the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) changes depending on how the ball wins in the round game R (play mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues multiple times, the player can be prevented from getting bored and can maintain concentration on the game.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the 10th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. It should be noted that until the end of the fourth round round game R is the same as in the case of the sixth operation pattern described above, the explanation will be omitted.

When the fourth round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second inter-round interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the second interval time Int2 has elapsed, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) has elapsed. After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined period of time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it in the closed state again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a short time.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed is a short-time operation, it is basically impossible to cause the ball to flow down to the specific area 4830.

In addition, since the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state during the round game R of the 5th round, if the round game can be finished early, the ball that entered the first specific prize opening 1000a in the 5th round will flow down to the specific area 4830. However, in this operation pattern, the fifth round of round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, it is not possible to enter the specified number of balls, and the round game of the fifth round cannot be ended early. Therefore, the ball that won the first specific winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round cannot be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In addition, in this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R has the same parts as the above-mentioned sixth operation pattern. It is possible to achieve the same effect as in the operation pattern No. 6.

Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning hole 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round. Since the other parts of the pattern are the same, it is difficult to understand the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 4000 can be improved.

The 10th operation pattern, in relation to the 6th operation pattern and the 7th operation pattern, causes the ball to flow down into the specific area 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 is filled up in the 4th round of the round game R. The difference is that it cannot be done.

That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not reassured even if the balls can be fully stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the round game R, and the ejected balls are stored in a specific area. You can be prompted to confirm whether or not you want to pass 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage (first step) of determining whether or not balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and before the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass, the sorting operation member 4851 operates. It is possible to draw attention to a different part for each stage by dividing it into a step of deciding whether or not to do so (second step). This prevents the player from playing the game aimlessly and improves the player's concentration.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball corresponding to the jackpot type can be won regardless of the progress of the game in a variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment 5000 is equipped with a ball release adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for the player to obtain a larger number of balls as the number of fluctuations until a jackpot is obtained in a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is smaller. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable prize winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covered front plate 2200, and the like in the second embodiment. In addition to the opening/closing plate 1300, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, the present embodiment also includes a power transmission member 5400 that is slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, and new features in this embodiment. It mainly includes a ball exit adjustment device 5900 that adjusts the ball exit by allowing the ball that entered the second ball entry port 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 that extends downward from the lower end of the rotating tip portion 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip portion 1421.

As shown in FIG. 45, the time difference forming part 5423 has a lower end extending to a position where it comes into contact with the engaging part 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is in a non-energized state.

In addition to the configuration described above in the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 5800 includes an intervening rod portion 5850 with a slightly additional shape, and a transmission rod portion 2860 that can be slid vertically on the left side in rear view. It is arranged so that it can come into contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the ball exit adjustment device 5900 by being pushed down by the branched part of the intervening rod part 5850 (the L-shaped part added to the configuration of the intervening rod part 2850 in the second embodiment in rear view). A push-down action section 5870 is provided.

The ball exit adjustment device 5900 includes a downstream passage forming part 5910 through which the ball that has entered the second ball entry opening 640 flows down, and a downstream passage forming part 5910 that is formed through the thin plate member 1100 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end of the downstream passage forming part 5910 to store the ball. The communication hole 5920 is arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) that allows the ball to flow into the flow path 1231, and the opening/closing member 5930 opens and closes the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for. Note that the downstream path forming section 5910 is arranged in such a manner that it passes through the back side of the second variable prize winning device 5800 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 45), and is illustrated with imaginary lines for ease of understanding. Also, illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

The flow path forming section 5910 is a flow path branched into two parts through which the ball that has entered the second ball entrance port 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920 to direct the ball to the communication hole 5920. After the adjustment flow path 5911 is formed to allow the balls to flow in, and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceeds a specified number (30 in this embodiment), the balls further enter the second ball entry port 640. It mainly includes an excess bulb discharge channel 5915 for discharging the balls that have been removed to a bulb discharge channel (not shown).

The adjustment flow path 5911 includes a deceleration flow path 5912 that is formed as an inverted U-shaped flow path in rear view that curves by half a turn near the lower end, and a flow path from the upper end of the deceleration flow path 5912 to the second ball entry port 640. It mainly includes a fall channel 5913 extending vertically toward the rear.

Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the balls discharged from the communication hole 5920 reduce the load applied in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 from subsequent balls staying in the deceleration flow path 5912, regardless of the number of balls staying there. be able to. That is, the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the weight of the subsequent ball from the subsequent ball, and the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle slope (nearly horizontal slope) near the communication hole 5920. Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls staying, it is possible to equalize the speed at which the balls immediately before the communication hole 5920 are discharged from the communication hole 5920, and to equalize the load applied from the balls to the opening/closing member 5930.

Since the falling channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling ball is not decelerated and falls freely. Therefore, when a series of balls enter the second ball entry port 640, the first ball is decelerated first compared to the second ball, and by obstructing the flow of the second ball, the second ball may be erroneously This can prevent excess balls from entering the surplus ball discharge channel 5915.

In this embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 sequentially retains the balls from before the communication hole 5920, and when the number of retained balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball is placed in the excess ball discharge flow path 5915. The channel length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the balls after the 31st ball enter the surplus ball discharge channel 5915. In other words, up to 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, after the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this period, the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640, and by playing the game with a right-handed game, the player can aim to win the next jackpot while suppressing the loss of balls. On the other hand, since the ball that enters the second ball entry port 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, it stays in the adjustment channel 5911 from the start of the high probability state to as it approaches the end of the high probability state. Balls increase.

The opening/closing member 5930 is disposed in a position protruding inside the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510, 2810 are not energized, and closes the opening to a size smaller than the outer shape of a sphere. A movable closing member 5931 is disposed at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, and the movable closing member 5931 is connected to the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and is movable in the left-right direction as the solenoid 1510 is driven. a connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110; a slide rail portion 5933 disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be movable vertically relative to the connecting rod portion 5932; , an elastic spring 5934 whose one end is disposed on the connecting rod portion 5932 and applies a biasing force in the upward direction to the movable closing member 5931.

46(a) and 46(b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable prize winning device 5000 taken along the XLVI-XLVI line in FIG. 45. FIG. 46(a) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is open, and FIG. 46(b) shows a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and balls can flow into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and remain there, up to the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. However, the fourth ball AP54 is held in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920.

In the jackpot game, in this state, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that has passed through the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a flows into the storage channel 1231, so the communication hole The space for the ball AP54, which is held in a position where it will not fall out of the ball 5920, to enter the storage channel 1231 is filled with the ball IP51 that has flowed in. Therefore, the ball that is held in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 and is maintained at that position.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 become de-energized and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharge state, the movable closing member 5931 extends and the flow from the adjustment flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231 increases. The inflow of balls is regulated.

When the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 is completed, the state switches again to the state shown in FIG. 46(a), and the ball AP54, which was previously held in a position where it will not come out from the communication hole 5920, becomes the first ball and becomes the third ball. The balls up to this point flow into the storage channel 1231.

In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of balls from the adjustment channel 5911 into the storage channel 1231 is repeated, and the inflow is regulated to a maximum of three balls per opening of the communication hole 5920. Ru.

With reference to FIG. 47, a case where a jackpot game progresses by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. FIGS. 47(a) to 47(c) are partial rear views of the first variable prize winning device 5000. 47(a) to 47(c), the operations of the opening/closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening/closing member 5930 due to the drive of the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

47(a) shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is energized, and FIG. 47(b) shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the tip of the time difference forming part 5423 is on the back side of the engaging part 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 47(b) (on the near side of the drawing), and FIG. 47(c) shows a state in which the time difference forming part 5423 is arranged above the engaging part 1333.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, allowing the ball to pass therethrough.

When the state shown in FIG. 47(a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47(b), the movable closing member 5931 moves with the movement of the tip member 1520 and closes the communication hole 5920, while engaging the opening/closing plate 1300. Since the portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and movement of the opening/closing plate 1300 is restricted, the restriction member 2600 maintains the stored state.

In the state shown in FIG. 47(c), the regulating member 2600 is brought into the discharge state, and the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, when driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the balls from the discharge port 1150 starts, so that the adjustment flow path is It is possible to prevent balls from flowing in from 5911.

48(a) and 48(b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. 48(a) and 48(b), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the opening/closing member 5930 due to the drive of the solenoid 2810 are illustrated in chronological order. 48(a) shows a state in which the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are de-energized, and FIG. 48(b) shows a state in which the solenoid 2810 is energized.

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), when the solenoid 2810 is energized, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the push-down action portion 5870, thereby opening the communication hole 5920. This allows the balls to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the biasing force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

Therefore, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is energized, the communication hole 5920 is opened and the ball can flow into the storage channel 1231, while when it is de-energized, the communication hole 5920 is opened. It is closed and the flow into the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

In a jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the above-described mechanism, a fixed number of balls (in this embodiment, three balls each at maximum) flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (variable probability state of the special symbol), for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/320. It is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1. Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 30 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 30 times. The configuration is such that the state is set to normal after the end. In this embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In this embodiment, three types of special symbols are provided as jackpot types: "jackpot H", "jackpot h", and "jackpot i" (see FIG. 49). Although details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. configured.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which judgment values for determining jackpot types are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponds to each jackpot type and special It is defined in association with the type of ball entrance that triggered the drawing of the symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". is defined in association with jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

In the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (drawing based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot h are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot H or jackpot h occurs, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the 11th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2250 prize balls, and can also win a prescribed number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive a prescribed upper limit of payouts.

In the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the jackpot i are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot i is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed using the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum number of prize balls to be paid out and the time required for the jackpot game are variable depending on the number of balls that enter the second ball entrance 640 until the jackpot is won.

That is, when a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of special symbol 1 (drawing based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the player can expect to pay out the specified number of prize balls regardless of the timing of the jackpot; If a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on balls entering the second ball entry port 640), prize balls will be awarded according to the number of balls entered into the second ball entry port 640 until the jackpot is obtained. Since the maximum value of the number of balls to be paid out and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the payout of prize balls is varied depending on when the jackpot occurs in the right-handed game, in addition to the gameplay of winning the jackpot in the right-handed game. You can add gender. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game aimlessly, and it is possible to improve the ability to pay attention to each fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 50(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the 1 specific winning a prize hole 1000a and the 2nd specific winning a prize hole 2255a.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained below.

<When operating in the 11th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state and open the second specific winning opening 2255a. This causes the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning position is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the round game R of the first round, the communication hole 5920 is opened with the opening of the second specific prize opening 2255a, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). When storing balls from the second storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 balls can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so how many balls (1 to 1 Even if the number of winnings is 3, there is no problem and the round game R can be ended by winning the specified number of winnings (10C).

When the first round round game R ends, the timer means operates the solenoids 1510, 2810 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third inter-round interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. is driven and controlled, and after the third inter-round interval time Int3 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started. Here, a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 in an interval of 3 seconds, so at the end of the first round round game R, a part of the storage channel 1231 and a part of the second storage channel 2250 It is possible to discharge all the balls that can be stored in series (up to 14 balls).

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is made to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, in the same way, the 3rd to 15th round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int3 between each round game R, and the slide board 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third inter-round interval time Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 from the adjustment channel 5911 each time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the maximum number of balls (30 balls) are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, all the balls will be removed from the storage flow by the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the 10th round round game R). Since the balls can enter the channel 1231, the jackpot game can be completed without any balls remaining in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating in the 12th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started. Note that up to the fourth round, round game R, the operation pattern is the same as the eleventh operation pattern, so the explanation will be omitted.

When the fourth round of round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third inter-round interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the third interval time Int3 has elapsed, the fifth round of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) using the timer means, and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific prize opening 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fifth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

Here, even in the fifth round of the round game R, the ball can enter from the through hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the balls actually flow through the through hole 5920, it is not possible to win the prescribed number of balls. Therefore, the prize balls that can be won in the round game R of the 5th round of this operation pattern are smaller than the prize balls that can be won in the round game R of the same round in the 11th operation pattern. Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operating time T1 has elapsed, the time until the end of the jackpot game becomes long.

Thereafter, similarly, the 6th to 15th round round games R are repeated with the third inter-round interval time Int3 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third inter-round interval time Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In this operation pattern, the reduction in the number of prize balls and the extension of the round time that may occur in the subsequent round games R from the fifth round round game R are caused by balls flowing into the storage channel 1231 from the through hole 5920. This is caused by the fact that the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the jackpot changes how much the number of prize balls decreases and the round time increases. The number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of balls that have passed through the second ball entry port 640, while the number of balls that have passed through the second ball entry port 640 has drawn the special symbol 2 (second ball entry port). 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 is related to the number of drawings of the special symbol 2.

In addition, in the following explanation, in this operation pattern, the number of special symbol 2 lottery in the high probability state (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 will be explained. The explanation will be based on the assumption that the numbers are the same.

As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a once. That is, up to the fourth round of round game R, a maximum of 12 balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in round games from the 5th round onwards, the reason why balls flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is when the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911. This is the case. In other words, this is a case where the jackpot game is started after the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) has been received 13 or more times after transitioning to the high probability state. .

Therefore, if a jackpot is won between the transition to the high probability state and the 12th lottery of special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the number of prize balls will decrease. Since the round time is not extended, it is possible to improve the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th lottery.

In addition, even after the 13th drawing, the number of prize balls decreases for each drawing, and the round time increases for every 3 drawings, so it is difficult for players to decide in which drawing they can win the jackpot. can improve their attention span.

That is, for example, if a jackpot is won with 14 balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (14th lottery of special symbol 2), the balls are stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the round game R of the 5th round. Since the number of balls flowing into the channel 1231 is two, the number of balls that can be won in this round is eight. In addition, if you win a jackpot with 15 balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (15th lottery of special symbol 2), at the start of the 5th round round game R, they will pass through the communication hole 5920 and pass through the storage channel. Since the number of balls flowing into 1231 is 3, the number of balls that can be won in this round is 7. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the number of prize balls paid out in the fifth round of the round game R decreases.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in either case, the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 flow into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round of round game R. becomes 0. Therefore, from the round game R of the 6th round, it is possible to enter the specified number of balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and thereby the round game R of the 6th round can be completed, so that the round time can be reduced. No change occurs in the degree of extension.

In addition, when the remaining number of adjustment channels 5911 when winning a jackpot is 16 to 18 pieces, in the 6th round round game R, and when it is 19 to 21 pieces, in the 7th round round game R, 22 to 24 pieces are left. The number of prize balls decreases in the round game R of the 8th round when the ball is 25 to 27, in the round game R of the 9th round when the ball is 28 to 30, and in the round game R of the 10th round when the ball is 28 to 30. This results in an extension of the round time.

As a result, in a game where the high probability state ends depending on the number of drawings, as in this embodiment, there are cases where a jackpot is won shortly after transitioning to the high probability state, and cases where a jackpot is obtained just before the end of the high probability state. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the profits given to the players (the number of prize balls paid out, the playing time of the jackpot game, etc.).

In this case, in this embodiment, the benefit given to the player is reduced as the number of drawings from transition to the high probability state to winning the jackpot increases, so if the number of drawings until winning the jackpot is small, Originally, there should have been a chance to win the lottery with a high probability in the remaining number of lots, but it is possible to partially eliminate the dissatisfaction of players who are no longer able to win the lottery.

In other words, if you get a jackpot in the first lottery after reaching a high probability state, you should have been able to receive the remaining 29 lots and receive 59 lots the next time. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is again limited to 30 times can be partially resolved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

In addition, even in the high probability state, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), the second specific winning port 2255a is activated in the eleventh operation pattern. It becomes possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of drawings after the lottery is opened and closed and the state shifts to a high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) in which the player aims to land a ball in the first ball entrance 64 in a high probability state.

In this case, compared to the case of playing a right-handed game, the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 without leading to the drawing of special symbols increases, and the intervals at which drawings can be drawn become longer, resulting in a longer playing time. There is a possibility that it will be long.

Therefore, as a way of playing the game in a high probability state, the player should play the jackpot type ( Whether you aim to win the jackpot h) (play a right-handed game), be prepared for the fact that more balls will be ejected from the first out port 66 and the playing time will be longer until you get the jackpot, and play the jackpot game. It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot of the jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of a drop in prize balls (play a left-handed game). As a result, the range of gaming methods to be selected can be expanded depending on the player's preferences and the situation (playable time, etc.).

Note that after the high probability state ends, it becomes difficult to open the second ball entrance 640, and the player shifts to a left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment channel 5911, but in a jackpot of the jackpot type (jackpot H) that can be obtained in a left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by winning a specified number of balls, the benefits given to the player (benefits in terms of the number of prize balls and playing time) are not impaired. Therefore, even if a player stops playing with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to that player from being lost. A player can start playing a game at any timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of drawings of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (drawing based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (the number of drawings based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640) The explanation has been made assuming that the number of balls entering the opening 640 is the same number, but in the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 when winning the jackpot is equal to the number of special symbols 2 until winning the jackpot. It should be noted that the number of draws is unlikely to be the same as the number of draws.

In other words, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, and the player only recognizes whether or not he or she has won the jackpot in the lottery after the reach effect or the subsequent reach effect. , after the button press effect, etc., so the player usually continues to hit the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is possible to hold up to four balls entering the second ball entrance 640. In addition to the number of drawings at which the player can recognize the determination of a jackpot, a state is maintained in which a maximum of about four balls enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, even if a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 when the number of reserved balls is at its maximum, the player will not be able to receive a lottery, but the ball will enter the adjustment channel 5911, so the profit that the player can obtain in a jackpot game will be reduced. There is an increased possibility that the amount will decrease. Pending is extinguished when the fluctuation stops and the next fluctuation starts, so in other words, the longer the period until the fluctuation stops, the higher the possibility that the profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game will decrease. It turns out.

Therefore, it is possible to create a gaming experience in which there is a high possibility that the profit obtained by the player in a jackpot game will be reduced if the ball is left to hit during a performance with high expectations such as a long reach. This prevents the player from continuing to launch the ball during highly anticipated performances such as long reach, eliminating the player's concentration on adjusting the ball's ejection force. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's concentration on performances such as long reach, and it is possible to improve the player's ability to pay attention to the performances.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position, but the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the balls by driving. The arrangement of the spheres within the storage channel 1231 can be changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is disposed below the first variable winning device 6000 in this embodiment, and the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 are placed in a specific area 4830. It is configured such that the state after the jackpot game changes depending on whether or not the player passes the jackpot.

FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 6000 taken along the LII-LII line of FIG. 51. Note that FIG. 52 illustrates a retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covering member 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, regulating member 1600, In addition to the rear cover 1700), the sixth embodiment includes a new interference device 6900.

The interference device 6900 includes a solenoid 6910 that is disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and whose sliding movable shaft is arranged along a plane that is flat with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and the tip of the movable part of the solenoid 6910. The main body member 1100 mainly includes a distal end member 6920 fixed to the distal end member 6920 and an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the distal end member 6920.

The tip member 6920 includes a long hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The elongated hole 6921 is formed at an angle so that the distal end side of the distal end member 6920 is closer to the thin plate member 1110.

The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction in a through hole H61 formed in a thin plate member 1110 that is arranged to face the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200, and the rear end thereof is connected to the elongated hole 6921. The rear end portion moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. This back-and-forth movement allows entry into the storage flow path 1231 through the through hole H61.

The through hole H61 is arranged at a position slightly spaced to the left from the center of the third ball P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. When the interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 and is brought into an extended state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), the ball P3 is pressed and pushed toward the upstream side of the storage channel 1231.

53(a) and 53(b) are front views of the first variable prize winning device 6000. Note that FIG. 53(a) illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53(b) illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. In addition, balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated with imaginary lines, and a "V" is written on the balls that first enter the specific area 4830 according to the 13th operation pattern and the 14th operation pattern, which will be described later. .

As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), when the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, while when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the third ball is Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls remains at less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in this embodiment, when the prescribed number of balls for each round game R of the jackpot game is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state, the prescribed number of balls cannot be won. Since it is not possible to end the round game R by winning the specified number of prizes, the end of the round game R must be waited until the specified time. Effects that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below, together with a description of the game mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (the variable probability state of the special symbol), for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. It is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. After the end of the jackpot game, the normal state is set. However, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, the normal state is set until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times. It is configured so that the symbol is in a time saving state.

In this embodiment, two types of special symbol jackpots are provided: "Jackpot I" and "Jackpot J". Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the operating pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000 and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000 are different. It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to transition to a variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64), a jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . In the case of a jackpot I, two rounds of the jackpot game are executed using the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive approximately 285 prize balls, and almost certainly cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state).

On the other hand, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), a jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

In the case of a jackpot j, two rounds of the jackpot game are executed using the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the distribution device 4850. In this case, the player can receive approximately 300 prize balls and almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

As mentioned above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the player will almost certainly acquire the right to change the special symbol to the variable state (high probability state). Therefore, it is advantageous for the player compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64). Therefore, in order to win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640), the player must play the right-handed game when the special symbol is in a variable probability state (high probability state). conduct.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the variation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer when the regular symbol hits (1 seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640, so it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can make the transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, it is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbol, and if you hit the jackpot, you will almost certainly be able to transition to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. It becomes easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls because the state of changing probability of the special symbol that results in a jackpot (for which the player can obtain the right to win) becomes more likely to be repeated. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the specific area 4830 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54(b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning opening in the fourteenth operating pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830 over time.

In addition, in FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the inter-round first interval time Int1 is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). be done. Therefore, the lengths of each time in FIG. 54 are not used for relative comparison, and the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed based on the time relationship described below.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930, which is performed when a jackpot game is awarded, will be explained.

<When operating in the 13th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes a timer means (not shown) to close the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. , the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. After the sixth opening time OP6 has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment), and after the long-term operation time TL has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. Then, after the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the solenoid 6910 is driven to change the interference member 6930 to the extended state for a long-term operating time TL, and after the elapse of the long-term operating time TL, to maintain the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. The interference member 6930 is controlled to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in an extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, the prescribed number of balls cannot be entered into the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53(b)). In this embodiment, since the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1, the interference member 6930 is not activated until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is reached. is in the retracted state, so it is virtually impossible to win the prescribed number of balls, and the first round round game R ends after the first operating time T1 has elapsed.

Simultaneously with the end of the first round round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot be passed to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

When the second round round game R ends, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have passed, and the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to maintain the respective retracted states, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the 14th operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes a timer means (not shown) to close the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. , the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with a timer means, and to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. This causes the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, a timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. After the sixth opening time OP6 has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment), and after the long-term operation time TL has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep it closed again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed. Then, after the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for a short period of time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the elapse of the short time, the interference member 6930 is held in the retracted state again. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled to cause the interference member 6930 to operate for a short time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a short period of time, it is in the retracted state for most of the time, so that in the first round of the round game, as shown in FIG. It is possible to win the ball. Therefore, while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the opening/closing member 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the ejection state, and the ball can be ejected toward the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820. It can flow down to a specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to a variable probability state (high probability state).

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the round game R ends. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the prize opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

When the second round round game R ends, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have passed, and the interference member 6930 The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are driven and controlled so as to maintain the respective retracted states, and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time when it is expected that the number of winning balls will be 3 or more and less than 6 in the first round of the round game R. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is placed on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the player's line of sight is blocked by the ball, making it difficult to visually confirm the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This can make it difficult for the player to check the operating mode of the interference member 6930.

Therefore, the change caused by the protrusion of the interference member 6930 is limited to a slight movement of the third and subsequent balls within the storage channel 1231, so it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not a change has occurred due to the interference member 6930. To allow a player to enjoy the game of winning a ball in a first specific winning opening 1000a and storing the ball in a storage channel 1231 without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the operation of an interference member 6930. I can do it.

Then, the balls are stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage channel 1231, and even then, the first round of the round game R is not completed, which gives a sense of discomfort for the first time, and makes the user actually count the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to create a new gaming experience in which the player recognizes the difference between the types of jackpots for the first time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while making it difficult for the player to recognize changes in the situation (changes in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000 allows the player to It is possible to inform the player of the change in the situation of the game board 13 in an easily recognizable manner based on the sense of discomfort, and to make the player aware of the difference in the types of jackpots. Therefore, attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball placed at the vertical position of the falling position Pf3 falls as it is when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment The second fall delay plate 7260 is configured in such a manner that when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball placed at the vertical position of the fall position Pf3 can flow down toward the fall delay plate 3250 side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covered front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable prize winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is the XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). It is a partial sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the line. The first variable winning device 7000 of this embodiment has the same structure as the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment except for the covered front plate 7200, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has a structure similar to that described in the third embodiment (a thin plate member 1210, a side wall part 1220, a housing part 1230, a detection sensor 1240, and a fall delay plate 3250). ), this embodiment also includes a new second fall delay plate 7260.

The second fall delay plate 7260 is a plate member that extends to the back side of the thin plate member 1210 between the terminal end surface 3251b and the accommodating part 1230, and the second fall delay plate 7260 descends as the upper surface 7261 moves away from the detection sensor 1240. tilt. As shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 extends rearward to an extent that it does not interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300.

As shown in FIG. 56, the distance between the second fall delay plate 7260 and the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 near the detection sensor 1240 is less than the diameter of the sphere, and at the farthest position from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is less than the diameter of the sphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the movement locus of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second fall delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member whose contact with the ball changes depending on the route of the ball. This will be explained below.

58(a) and 58(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable prize winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). FIG. 58(a) shows a case where the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state with the ball placed near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, and FIG. 58(b) shows the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state. A case in which the ball rolls toward the falling position Pf3 in the meantime is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when the ball is placed in the vicinity of the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, the ball is moved to the cover front plate due to the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 that occurs when the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, in the process of flowing down, it comes into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260, flows down to the fall delay plate 3250 side along the slope of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 and returns to the falling position Pf3. reach.

Since the distance between the second fall delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball, the momentum of the ball is By having a large value, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling vertically on the back side of the second fall delay plate 7260.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball rolling on the fall delay plate 3250 moves toward the main body member 3100 side along the backward slope of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. It flows down while contacting with.

At this time, by arranging the center position (maximum diameter position) of the ball below the second fall delay plate 7260, the extension length of the second fall delay plate 7260 to the back side can be made smaller than the movement trajectory of the ball. The ball falling from above can be caught on the upper surface 7261 while being held on the front side.

The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of falling, and after reaching the falling position Pf3, it falls as it is. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the fall delay plate 3250 without any hitch.

In this manner, in this embodiment, depending on which direction the ball approaches the second fall delay plate 7260, it is possible to switch between cases where the ball is subjected to the action of the second fall delay plate 7260 and cases where the ball is not affected.

In this embodiment, while maintaining the effect of causing the balls rolling on the fall delay plate 3250 to fall smoothly to a position facing the terminal end surface 3251b, two balls roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 in succession, and Even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a closed state by passing through the detection sensor 1240, the fall of the ball placed immediately before the detection sensor 1240 can be delayed.

Furthermore, even if the two balls do not come in a row, it is possible that the opening/closing plate 1300 happens to be in the closed state when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 is placed in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can be caused to flow down toward the fall delay plate 3250 side. In this case, after the ball rolls to the left on the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260, it resumes rolling to the right along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, the ball can be maintained on the near side of the opening/closing plate 1300 for a period longer than the time required to roll over the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 . This makes it possible to reduce the number of wasted balls (balls that flow down the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first outlet 66) that may occur during the interval time.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging the balls from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member that opens and closes the second discharge port are provided so that the balls can be discharged from the second discharge port. You can also do it. In this case, the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port can be prevented from being discharged without strictly controlling the operating length of the second discharge port regulating member. Therefore, the number of balls to be discharged can be changed depending on when the balls are discharged from the first discharge port and when the balls are discharged from the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened simultaneously, the time required to discharge the entire sphere can be shortened, and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is configured with an opening/closing plate 1300 that moves up and down, and when placed in the upper position, the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a, and when placed in the lower position, the ball can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a. You may try to deflect it. In this case, when raising the ball, there is no need to place the ball in a position where it is sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the raising movement of the ball can be made smoother.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged from a single discharge port 1710, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be placed in the middle of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum number of pieces that can be discharged can be changed depending on whether the particles are discharged from the discharge port 1710 or from an additional discharge port. That is, it becomes difficult to discharge the balls stuck on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. Further, by opening both the discharge ports at the same time and discharging the balls, the efficiency of discharging the balls can be increased and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the distribution device 4850 of the probability fluctuation determination unit 4800 starts operating based on the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may change based on the weight of the balls depending on the number of balls passing through the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, whether or not the right to transition to the high probability state can be acquired can be switched based on the number of balls ejected, regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the timing at which the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating and the timing at which the regulating member 1600 starts operating are slightly different from each other, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, they may start operating at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance to the entry of the ball changes depending on whether there is a gap in the storage channel 1231 for the ball to enter (whether or not the storage channel 1231 is full) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a predetermined ball entering the storage channel 1231 is decelerated depending on whether the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is close to a full state. In this case, even if the prescribed number (count number) of the round game R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, winnings exceeding the prescribed number can be suppressed. Furthermore, in this case, compared to the case where the balls are decelerated regardless of the number of stored balls, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended while suppressing winnings exceeding the specified number. Note that the speed is not limited to deceleration, but may be accelerated. In this case, it is possible to intentionally cause more than the specified number of prizes to be won.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ball enters the first specific winning hole 1000a by the stored ball, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, it may be provided with a non-electrically operated member that moves by a predetermined amount as the ball that has reached the specific winning a prize opening 1000a passes, and that makes it easier to restrict the entry of the ball in a certain posture. In this case, compared to the case where the stored balls are discharged all at once, the time required for the interval between rounds can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a prescribed number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to store a prescribed number of balls plus one ball. In this case, the number of balls that exceed the specified number and pass through the first specific winning hole 1000a can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, it may be possible to switch between a round in which the 11th ball easily passes through and a round in which passage of the 11th ball is restricted for each round.

In each of the above embodiments, when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a (it will fall), so two balls will not win at the same time. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held and there is a possibility that the ball may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a until the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. Furthermore, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 has a plurality of inlets and a single outlet, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be disposed in the storage flow path, and the flow path may branch toward the outlet midway. In this case, a predetermined number of balls can remain in the storage channel 1231 no matter which outlet the balls are discharged from.

In the second embodiment described above, the case where the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the specified number of winnings (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game was explained, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the specified number of winnings (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the second specific winning opening 2255a. may be set to be equal to or greater than the specified number of winnings (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to construct a game in which the round time is inevitably extended when all balls are ejected at intervals between rounds and balls enter from the first specific winning hole 1000a.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has flown downward from the opening/closing plate 1300 is lifted up again by the opening/closing plate 1300, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be raised by a movable accessory that moves in a constant motion and can pick up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the delay member (drop delay plate 3250) is disposed below the opening/closing plate 1300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening/closing plate 1300 may be formed in such a manner that it slides in a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib may be disposed above the opening/closing board 1300, projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the gaming area. When the sliding opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the ball does not come into contact with the rib, and when the sliding opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball may come into contact with the rib. Thereby, even above the opening/closing plate 1300, the falling speed of the ball can be changed and the flowing down can be delayed.

In addition, as a method of preventing the ball from coming into contact with the rib, there is a method of moving the ball to either the front or rear by tilting the ball in the front-rear direction, and arranging the rib on the opposite side.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the fall delay plate 3250 disposed on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 delays the falling of the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be configured as a curved passage passing through the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300. In this case, the ball that passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and once becomes difficult to see from the player due to the opening/closing plate 1300 is ejected from the exit again. In addition, since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area in front of the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round starts even if the interval is long. It is possible to secure a sufficient area for

Note that it is desirable that the inlet is located below the opening/closing plate 1300 and the exit is located above the opening/closing plate 1300. Further, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the entrance opening is narrowed by a portion of the opening/closing plate 1300 to an extent that can prevent the passage of the ball. In this case, the opening/closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

In the third embodiment, the ball is decelerated by moving the opposing surface 3251a of the extending plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 as it goes downstream, but this is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the downstream direction of the ball becomes smaller, and the ball can be decelerated.

Further, the change in acceleration and deceleration may be reversed. When the ball accelerates as it goes downstream, formation of consecutive balls on the fall delay plate 3250 can be prevented.

In the third embodiment described above, the fall delay plate 3250 is disposed below the opening/closing plate 1300, so that only the balls that have passed through the opening/closing plate 1300 downward are brought into contact with the opening/closing plate 1300. However, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, with a back and forth sliding opening/closing plate, in the open state, the ball enters the pocket where the winning hole is placed, and in the closed state, the ball rolls on the top surface of the opening/closing plate, and the rolling ball opens and closes. A rib that can be abutted when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. A ball that enters the pocket as it is will not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down as the opening/closing plate operates.

In the third embodiment, the fall delay plate 3250 is omitted from being formed at the fall position Pf3, and the ball falls vertically downward at a position immediately before the detection sensor 1240, but this is not necessarily the case. . For example, the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left and right direction, and a through hole is formed through which the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 in the right direction can pass, and the ball is ejected from the through hole. You may also do so. In this case, the ball can be placed above the opening/closing plate 1300 even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is placed in front of the detection sensor 1240.

Note that this is different from the second fall delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left and right direction, the ball that falls at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and lands on the fall delay plate 3250 remains to the right (the detection sensor 1240), but the ball that fell onto the second fall delay plate 7260 due to a similar fall once flows down to the left (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then falls back onto the fall delay plate 3250. reach. That is, the period during which the ball is delayed in flowing down below the opening/closing plate 1300 and the path in which the ball flows are different.

In the fifth embodiment described above, a case will be described in which the channels through which balls that enter from the second ball entry port 640 and each specific winning port 1000a, 2255a flow down merge into the storage channel 1231, and the number of balls entered is related to each other. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls may be automatically supplied into the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the balls remain in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which, in a high probability state, the greater the number of drawings until winning a jackpot, the less profit the player obtains, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the more the number of drawings until winning a jackpot, the more profit the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained from a jackpot won in a short time is small, and the profit obtained from a jackpot obtained over a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be equalized.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operating member may be provided that operates within the storage channel 1231 in accordance with the number of balls stored and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231. In this case, since the operating member moves depending on the number of stored items, regardless of the driving timing of the drive device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to reasons such as the operating timing of the operating member being different from normal.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the structure may be such that a portion forming the storage channel 1231 (particularly a U-shaped portion) moves in the extending direction (left and right direction) of the channel to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231. It's okay. In this case, even if the player moves in advance, the amount of movement is small, making it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the player has moved. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay in which the movement of the member (change in the length of the storage channel 1231) is noticed only after the balls are accumulated in the storage channel 1231, and the attention of the player to the first variable winning device 6000 is increased. can be improved.

Note that the movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of a solenoid, or the driving device may be used to only switch whether or not movement is possible, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the interference member 6930 protrudes with a predetermined number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging state may be formed before the balls start entering the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. Further, a pattern in which the overhanging state is formed after the balls are stored and a pattern in which the overhanging state is formed before the balls start to enter the storage channel 1231 may be mixed in each round. In this case, it is possible to switch between a round in which the number of stored items is 7 and a round in which the number of stored items is 9 using a single member.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be able to change into an extended state while discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing for ejecting the ball and the timing for bringing the interference member 6930 into the extended state, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns for ejecting the ball.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Points to avoid winning more than the target number>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , a game characterized by comprising ball entry prevention means for making it difficult for balls to pass through the ball entry port in a state in which the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entry port in a predetermined period of time; Machine A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big winning hole is oriented sideways, and the operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates when the balls pass through the opening, and drops the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when multiple balls roll unexpectedly on the operating member, the extra balls may Since there is a possibility that balls may pass through the detection port, there is a problem that there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means can make it difficult for balls beyond the predetermined number to pass through the detection means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball when placed on the upstream side of the ball entrance, the ease of passage of the ball when passing through the ball entrance is determined by the number of balls within a predetermined number and the number of balls within a predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with subsequent balls. Thereby, it is possible to prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection port.

Note that the means for preventing ball entry may include means for changing the ease with which the ball passes through the entrance hole according to the detection result of the detection means, or means for always maintaining the ease with which the ball passes through the entrance hole. is exemplified.

In gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means includes a storage means in which the ball that has passed through the ball entry opening is stored, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball comes out from the accommodation means, and a discharge port for the ball. a discharge switching means that can switch between a first state in which a ball can pass through and a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port; A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the gaming machine A2 is formed with a volume that can accommodate at most the predetermined number of balls.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the accommodating means is formed with a volume that accommodates a predetermined number of balls at maximum between the ball entry port and the ejection port, so that the ejection switching is possible. When the means is maintained in the second state and balls are stored in the accommodation means, the balls accommodated in the accommodation means can prevent more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent balls beyond a predetermined number from passing through the ball entry port.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A2, wherein the ball entry switching means is configured to be maintainable in the second state while the ejection switching means is in the first state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball into the accommodating means from the ball entrance while the ball is being ejected from the accommodating means. Note that the operation timings of the ejection switching means and the ball entry switching means may be simultaneous or different.

A gaming machine A4, which is the gaming machine A2 or A3, further comprising a drive means that serves both as the ejection switching means and the ball entry switching means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by a dual-purpose driving means. Thereby, space and cost savings can be achieved.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A4, after the ball entry switching means starts changing the state from the second state to the first state, the ejection switching means changes from the first state to the first state. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the state changes are ordered in such a manner that the state changes are started toward two states, and the state changes are completed substantially simultaneously.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the ball that has entered the accommodation means is ejected from the ejection port after the ball entry switching means is in the first state. While preventing (preventing irregular winnings), it is possible to start operating the ball entry switching means from the second state before the ball is completely ejected from the ejection port. Compared to the case where the operation of the ball entry switching means is started after the ball entry switching means is completed, the number of balls that pass through the entry ball switching means, flow down the gaming area, and head toward the out exit can be reduced.

Note that the ordering of state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching means, or each switching means may be provided with its own driving means to control the switching timing. It's okay.

A gaming machine A6, which is any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, and includes a changing means for changing the maximum number of pieces accommodated in the accommodating means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of pieces accommodated in the accommodation means can be changed by the changing means, so that the maximum number of pieces accommodated in the accommodation means can be changed temporarily (for example, in a particular round). It is possible to create a state in which more balls than the number of balls are accommodated in the accommodation means. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine by changing a predetermined number of numerical values using the same-shaped storage means (it is possible to correspond to different specifications). This makes it possible to reduce development costs compared to creating shapes based on specifications.

In gaming machine A6, the ball entry port communicates with the first ball entry port and the accommodation means downstream of the first ball entry port, and allows the ball flowing down the gaming area to pass therethrough. a second ball entry port whose passability is switched by the ball entry switching means; when a ball enters the accommodation means from the first ball entry port, and when the ball enters the accommodation means from the second ball entry port; The maximum number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means is changed depending on when a ball enters the means, and the changing means selectively sets which entrance opening the ball is allowed to pass through. Game machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A6, it is possible to store both the ball entering from the first ball entry port and the ball entering from the second ball entry port in the storage means. Therefore, the space required can be reduced compared to the case where separate storage means are provided for each.

In gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interference means capable of protruding into the interior of the accommodation means, and when the interference means extends into the interior of the accommodation means and interferes with the balls stored, A gaming machine A8 characterized in that the maximum number of pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating means is changed depending on when the gaming machine A8 is evacuated to the outside of the gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the number of balls accommodated can be changed by changing the internal volume of the accommodating means without changing the path of entry of the balls into the accommodating means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the number of accommodated pieces without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In gaming machine A8, the interference means protrudes from the back side of the gaming area into the interior of the storage means, and is configured such that the ball can be placed on the front side when retracted. Game machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of retreat can be hidden by the ball placed in front. This makes it possible to make the operation of the interference means less noticeable while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Key points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing overballs>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at an upstream position of the ball entry opening when the ball entry switching means is in the second state, compared to when the ball entry switching means is in the first state; A game machine B1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big winning hole is oriented sideways, and the operating member that rolls the balls toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates when the balls pass through the opening, and drops the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the ball that falls from the operating member inevitably flows down to the out port, so it is difficult to hit the ball without causing the ball to fall from the operating member. There has been a problem in that the number of balls actually hit varies depending on whether the ball is hit or not (the level of the player's ball launch technique).

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when the ball entry switching means is in the second state in which it cannot guide the ball flowing down from the upstream position of the ball entry port to the ball entry port, the delay means operates. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily keep the ball at the upstream position of the ball entrance until the ball entry switching means switches to the first state. If the ball entry switching means is in the first state while the ball is at the upstream position of the ball entry port, the ball is guided to the ball entry port. As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the player's hitting technique on the actual number of balls hit, so it is possible to construct a gaming machine that is friendly to beginners.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be a fall regulating means that is composed of an oblong member that supports the ball from below and prevents it from falling all the way to the end, or it may be a protrusion that is formed from a protrusion that decelerates the ball by contacting it.

In gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the delay means increases the degree of delay when the ball is placed on the downstream side, compared to when the ball is placed on the upstream side.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases when the ball is placed downstream of the delaying means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delaying means is increased. can be improved.

Note that there are no limitations to the degree of delay. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the ball entry switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that the distance between the ball placed on the downstream side and the opening direction of the ball entry hole is larger than the ball placed on the upstream side. Game machine B3 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in such a manner that the distance between the opening direction of the ball entrance and the ball increases when the delay means is arranged downstream of the delay means. is formed, so that when a ball flows down the delay means with great force, it can be prevented from directly entering the ball entry hole.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the ball entry switching means includes a raising means for raising the gaming area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delaying means A game machine B4 characterized in that it is arranged below the raising means in the state.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, since the delaying means is disposed lower than the raising means in the first state, the ball does not move from the entering ball switching means. The ball can be delayed while making it appear as if the ball has fallen to the player. Thereby, attention to the ball can be improved.

A game machine B5, which is a game machine B4, further comprising a rise regulating means disposed upstream of the ball's downward movement path than the rising means, for regulating the upward movement of the ball and guiding it in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the upward movement regulating means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction, so that a load is applied to the ball when the upward movement means rises. This prevents the ball from flying in unexpected directions.

The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the gaming machine B5 is provided with a rescue ball entry opening that allows the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the rise regulating means to enter the ball and provides a predetermined profit to the player.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball that flies due to the load applied when the elevating means rises, as a profit different from the profit generated when the ball passes through the ball entrance. , it is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the relief ball entrance. As a result, even if the ball deviates from the flow path toward the ball entrance, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from decreasing, and the movement of the ball can improve the player's interest.

A gaming machine B7 in any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, wherein the delaying means includes a variable action section that gives different effects to the ball depending on the manner in which the delaying means reaches the delaying means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the effect of delaying the ball can be varied depending on the manner in which the ball reaches the delay means. This allows each ball to be selected and given a different effect.

Note that the manner in which the arrival manner differs is not limited. For example, it may be a difference in the arrival position of the ball based on the ball entrance, or a difference in the downward direction of the ball until it reaches the delay means.

In the gaming machine B7, the variable action section delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position spaced apart from the ball entry hole by a predetermined distance or less, and at the same time delays the ball from flowing down by a predetermined distance or more from the ball entry hole. A game machine B8 characterized in that no action is applied to the ball that has reached the delay means at the position.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B7, the variable action section delays the ball's flow for balls that are close to the ball entrance and the state of the ball entry switching means cannot be switched in time. On the other hand, by setting the variable action section not to act on a ball that is far from the ball entrance and has enough time to switch the state of the ball entry switching means, an appropriate gaming speed can be maintained.

<Points for adjusting the ball release in jackpot games>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , when the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, the number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls that passed through the ball entry port during the period in which the first state was previously formed; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number of pieces.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015- (See Publication No. 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of balls that can be won into the jackpot in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that there was a risk of discrepancies.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the number changing means changes the number of balls that pass through the ball entrance in the state where the entering ball switching means forms the first state, and the number of balls that pass through the ball entry opening when the entering ball switching means Since the change can be made in relation to the number of balls passing through the ball entrance when one state is formed, the profit given to the player in a series of operation patterns in which the ball entry switching means repeatedly forms the first state can be changed. Adjustments can be made.

Note that the method of adjusting profits is not limited. For example, if the entering ball switching means has previously formed the first state and a large number of balls have passed through the ball entry opening, then when the entering ball switching means has formed the first state, the entering ball The number of balls that can be placed in the mouth may be suppressed, or the player's profit (not limited to the number of balls put out, For example, the acquisition of the right to transition to a high probability state may be increased.

In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes a storage means in which the balls that have passed through the ball entry port are stored, an ejection port through which the balls pass when the balls are ejected from the storage means, and a plurality of balls that pass through the ejection port. a discharge switching means that can be switched between a first state in which a ball can pass through the discharge port and a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port; A game machine C2 characterized by comprising an operation mode switching means that can change the number of balls ejected from the storage means depending on a difference in operation mode.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means to be ejected from the discharge port can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that no balls remain in the accommodation means. In addition, the number of remaining pitches can be made variable. Thereby, the number of balls required to fill the storage means with balls can be changed, and the maximum number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port can be physically changed.

Note that the manner in which the operation manner is different is not limited at all. For example, the operation period may be varied, or when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, the discharge switching means disposed at which discharge port is to be operated (operated target) may be varied.

A gaming machine C3 in the gaming machine C2, wherein the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining the interval at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, since the interval between balls ejected from the ejection port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, the ejection is possible regardless of the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means. The number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be determined depending on the length of the period during which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

Note that the form of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the shape of the flow path may be such that the direction of the load received by the ball immediately before the discharge port from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened, or A rib that is provided in a protruding manner and applies a load to the ball to decelerate the ball may be used as a means for this purpose.

A gaming machine C3 in which the distance maintaining means includes a protruding portion that protrudes from the inner surface of the accommodating means in the downstream path of the ball in the vicinity of the discharge port.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, since the protruding part is protruded into the downstream path, the balls flowing down are brought into contact with the protruding part and decelerated, thereby reducing the ball distance from the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flowing speed from greatly changing between balls that are close to each other from the discharge port, and it is possible to equalize the flowing speed of the balls.

In the gaming machine C4, the storage means includes a discharge path that causes the balls to flow down in a series in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protruding portions are arranged in a staggered manner from the opposing surfaces forming the discharge path. A gaming machine C5, which is projected at predetermined intervals.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C4, the protrusions are protruded from the opposing surface at predetermined intervals in an alternating manner, so that the balls are caused to collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path. The ball can be caused to collide with the protrusion at predetermined intervals while being displaced in the vertical direction of the predetermined flow direction, and the effect of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long period of time.

In the gaming machine C5, the storage means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and rolls the ball just before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that the ball is formed so that the speed of the ball flowing down is greater than the speed of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so that the balls stored in the storage means are Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are ejected from the outlet can be kept constant.

A game machine C7, which is any one of the game machines C1 to C6, wherein the ball entry hole includes a starting hole for determining a jackpot of a special symbol by passing a ball.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of jackpot determinations of special symbols can be associated with the number of balls entering the ball opening. Thereby, the number of payouts in the jackpot game can be changed depending on the number of special symbol determinations required to obtain the jackpot.

The gaming machine C7 includes a starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting opening can enter the accommodation means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the ball entry switching means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices installed can be reduced.

By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means independently changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port. The first outlet and the second outlet are configured to be capable of discharging the ball from the first outlet or the second outlet depending on whether (under the same conditions) the ball is discharged from the first outlet or the second outlet. The remaining balls may be arranged at positions where the number of balls can be changed.

In this case, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so the velocity of the balls flowing down the storage means can be changed. Even in this case, the number of balls discharged from the storage means can be maintained.

Note that the arrangement of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other at an intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branched channel for distributing the balls upstream thereof. You can also do it.

Further, the operation modes of the first discharge port and the second discharge port are not limited. For example, one may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be shortened compared to when the balls are discharged from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls ejected from the outlet during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Incidentally, the first discharge port may be arranged at the lower end of the storage means, and the second discharge port may be arranged upstream of the first discharge port.

In this case, when discharging the ball from the second discharge port, regardless of the period during which the second discharge port is in the first state, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is placed in the storage means. can be retained. Therefore, even if there is variation in the number of balls accommodated in the storage means, it is possible to easily maintain a constant number of balls remaining after the balls are discharged. Further, even if the number of balls to be launched is reduced due to ball clogging or the like, it is possible to easily create a state in which the balls remain inside the storage means.

Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side of a branch at the lower end of the storage means.

In this case, from a state where the same number of balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to switch which outlet the last ball will be ejected from by using the operation mode of the ejection switching means. It can be difficult to grasp the ejection mode of the ball from the behavior at the beginning. That is, for example, when the benefit given to the player changes depending on which outlet the last ball is ejected from, it is possible to improve attention to the manner in which the ball flows down.

<Points for adjusting the ball output for each round in jackpot games>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , a switching drive means for switching and driving the ball entry switching means to the second state when a predetermined number of balls pass through the ball entry opening during the first state; a post-drive ball entry state switching device capable of forming a permissive state that allows the ball to pass through the ball entry port and a restricted state that restricts the ball from passing through the ball entry port after the switching drive by the switching drive device has started; A gaming machine D1 comprising:

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015- (See Publication No. 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of balls that can be won into the jackpot in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that there was a risk of discrepancies.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the ball entry state switching means after driving switches whether or not a ball can enter after the ball entrance opening is closed by the switching drive means, an extra ball may enter. The timing can be reduced and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D1, the ball entry port includes a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the ball entry state switching means after driving sets the regulation state in the first ball entry port. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second ball entry opening is formed in the permissible state.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is generated when the ball passes through the first ball entry port and when the ball passes through the second ball entry port. Since it is possible to switch whether or not a ball can enter the ball, it is possible to improve attention as to which ball entry opening is opened by the ball entry switching means.

In the gaming machine D2, the first ball entry port is provided with a drop hole on the front side of the opening thereof, and when the ball entry switching means starts switching to the second state, the first ball entry port is provided with a drop hole on the front side of the opening of the first ball entry port. A game machine D3 is configured in such a manner that a ball placed on the upstream side is dropped into the drop hole.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entrance, the ball is transferred to the falling hole while the ball entrance switching means maintains the second state. The ball can be dropped into the ball and kept away from the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent balls exceeding the specified number from passing through the first ball entry port.

<The point where the balls join from multiple winning ports into the storage channel>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , comprising a storage means for accommodating up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entry port, and the ball entry port includes at least a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port, and the ball entry port includes at least a first ball entry port and a second ball entry port. Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the accommodation means is formed in such a manner that the balls that have passed through the second ball entry port join together.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015- (See Publication No. 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of balls that can be won into the jackpot in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that there was a risk of discrepancies.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port merge inside the storage means that can accommodate up to a predetermined number of balls. The number of balls that can pass through the second ball entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port (accompanying number of balls paid out) can be made uniform throughout the game.

In the gaming machine E1, when the accommodation means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the first ball entry port, and the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the second ball entry port. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first ball entry port and the number of balls that can enter the second ball entry port are different, so It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the ball entrance opening is opened.

In the gaming machine E2, the number of balls that can be accommodated through the first ball entrance is set to be smaller than the number that can be stored through the second ball entrance, and when each ball entrance is closed, a predetermined upper limit number of balls are ejected. The upper limit of the number of balls is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is opened between openings when the second ball entrance is opened a plurality of times. A game machine E3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the ball that passes through the second ball entrance port before opening the first ball entrance port, and the ball that passes through the second ball entrance port after opening the first ball entrance port. The actual benefits given to the player can vary depending on the ball that passes through the ball.

In other words, if a ball passes through the second ball entrance before opening the first ball entrance, even if more balls than can be accommodated from the first ball entrance have passed through the second ball entrance, The remaining amount will not be ejected, and the number of balls after subtracting the remaining amount will be accommodated from the first ball entry port, so in the end, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the second ball entry port is the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entry port. The player can only obtain the same profit as if he had passed the number of pieces.

On the other hand, if a ball passes through the second ball entrance after opening the first ball entrance, and more balls pass through the second ball entrance than can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, those balls will not be deducted. The player can earn additional profits as the player will not be disappointed.

<Point where the interference member protrudes>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. , characterized in that it is provided with an interference means that is disposed in the flow path of the ball that has passed through the ball entry port and that can be switched between an extended state where it can interfere with the ball and a retracted state where it does not interfere with the ball. A gaming machine F1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015- (See Publication No. 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of balls that can be won into the jackpot in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that there was a risk of discrepancies.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, since the interference means is arranged in the falling path of the ball that has passed through the ball entrance, by maintaining the interference means in an extended state, it is possible to reach the ball from the ball entrance to the interference means. It is possible to block the path of the ball with balls and prevent any more balls from passing through the ball entrance. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the prize balls throughout the jackpot game depending on the operation mode of the interference means.

A gaming machine F2, which is the gaming machine F1, further comprising a stopping means for stopping the ball in front of the interfering means when the interfering means is in a retracted state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the extended state with the ball stopped in front of the interference means, so that when the state of the interference means is changed in advance. Compared to , the movement can be hidden by the sphere. Therefore, the movement can be made difficult for the player to notice.

In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is allowed to pass, and the above-mentioned changeover mode of the stopping means is A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the mode of state change of the interference means can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the mode of the state change of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means can be configured in multiple types, so that while the stopping means is maintained in the passing state, The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be varied in multiple ways.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a player will win based on the attacker's movements>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port; A benefit giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player when the ball passes through the ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. In the gaming machine, there is a case where a ball can pass through the profit giving means in an operating mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same; A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is possible to switch between a case where a ball cannot pass through the imparting means and a case where a ball cannot pass through.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the ball that passes through the grand prize opening is sorted by the sorting unit into either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the sorting. There are gaming machines that do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operating mode of the opening/closing plate of the grand prize opening during the period in which the distributing section is in a state where it is possible to distribute the balls to the advantageous route is the operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the operation mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route. Since the opening/closing plate operates (closes), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading toward the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the perspective of drawing attention to the behavior of the ball that enters the grand prize opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operating mode in which the conditions for maintaining the ball entry switching means in the first state are the same, there are cases where the ball can pass through the profit giving means and cases where the ball can pass through the profit giving means. Since it is possible to switch between cases where it is not possible, there is no possibility of blocking the ball from entering the ball entrance. This makes it possible to maintain attention to the ball heading toward the ball entrance.

The gaming machine G1 is provided with a stopping means that is arranged upstream of the profit switching means and can be switched between a stopping state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is allowed to pass. As the ball entering switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stopping means is switched from the stopping state to the passing state, and the ball flowing downstream of the stopping means is switched to the profit switching state. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching a means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, by once stopping the ball that has passed through the ball entrance in the stopping means disposed upstream of the profit switching means, the ball can be turned into a profit at any timing. It is possible to prevent it from reaching the switching means. This prevents the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing, no matter how the ball passes through the ball entrance while the ball entry switching means is in the first state. can.

The gaming machine G2 is characterized by comprising period changing means for changing the period during which a ball passing through the stopping means and flowing down can reach the profit switching means after switching the stopping means to the passing state. Game machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the period changing means changes the period during which the ball can reach the profit switching means after passing the stopping means, so that after the ball passes the stopping means It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the gameplay, and it is possible to improve the player's interest until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

Note that the period changing means may be a means for changing the velocity of the ball passing through the stopping means, or may be a means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the ball starts flowing down. It may also be a means for changing the number of balls that are stopped at the stopping means.

The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the period changing means is configured to be able to change the number of balls parked in the parking means depending on the profit given to the player.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to predict the profit given to the player based on the number of balls parked in the parking means, so that attention is paid to the balls parked in the parking device. Can improve strength.

Note that the means for switching the number of balls parked in the parking means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be held in the holding means can be changed by combining a period in which the holding means is in the passing state and a period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

That is, for example, if the period in which the ball is in the passing state is extremely shortened, and then the period in which the ball entering switching device is in the first state is extremely shortened immediately after that, the inside of the ball that was staying in the stopping device may be shortened. Since the number of balls flowing downstream of the retaining means is extremely reduced, even if no new balls enter from the ball entrance, a large number of balls remain at the retaining means.

On the other hand, if the period during which the ball entry switching means is set to the first state immediately after a sufficiently long period of time for the stopping means to be in the passing state is made extremely short, the ball remaining at the holding means may In addition to the fact that most of the balls flow downstream of the retaining means, no new balls enter from the ball entrance, so that almost no balls are retained in the retaining means.

In this way, by changing the period during which the ball is in the passing state and shortening the period in which the ball entry switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter, the ball remains in the stopping means regardless of the firing mode of the ball. The number of balls can be changed.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ball entry switching means is provided with a setting means for selecting and setting a closed maintenance period from a plurality of types during which the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state, and for a predetermined period from the end point of the closed maintenance period. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a period of time has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of periods during which the ball entry switching means maintains the second state, so that the ball stays in the stopping means. Since there are multiple types of periods from passing through until the profit switching means is switched to the first state, even if the number of balls parked in the stopping means is the same, the game balls will not pass the profit giving means. It is possible to control the cases in which it passes and the cases in which it does not pass. Therefore, the ability to pay attention to the falling ball can be continuously improved.

For example, the ball entry switching means may be maintained in the first state for a sufficiently long period of time to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the ball entry opening, and the ball entry switching means may be maintained in the second state immediately thereafter. When the setting means selects the closed maintenance period in an extremely short manner (shorter than the time when the ball passing through the stopping means reaches the profit switching means), the entering ball switching means becomes the first state immediately after that. By changing the state of the profit switching means starting from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set the period from when the stopping means is in the passing state until the profit switching means is in the first state. Therefore, irrespective of the timing at which the ball entry switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit giving means. As a result, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not a ball that passes through the stopping means passes through the profit giving means, regardless of the number of balls stopping at the stopping means and the mode of stopping (for example, timing).

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is caused not by the first action caused by the entry of a prescribed number of balls into the ball entry opening, but by the second action caused by the passage of a prescribed time. A game machine G6 is characterized in that it is provided with an intentional selection means for intentionally selecting the game.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time by the action of the intentional selection means, Randomness in switching due to the manner in which the ball passes through the ball entrance can be eliminated. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of time in which the ball is not allowed to enter while the profit switching means is in the first state.

Note that an example of the intentional selection means is to set a state in which no balls pass through the ball entry port by passing fewer than a prescribed number of balls. This can be achieved by intentionally blocking (preventing) the ball from passing through the ball entrance.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not V will win based on the attacker's movements: Paka is present>
A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port; A benefit giving means that gives a predetermined profit to the player when the ball passes through the ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched by, and is configured such that the manner in which a ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operating manner of the ball entry switching means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the ball that passes through the grand prize opening is sorted by the sorting unit into either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the sorting. There are gaming machines that do this (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operating mode of the opening/closing plate of the grand prize opening during the period in which the distributing section is in a state where it is possible to distribute the balls to the advantageous route is the operation for causing the ball to flow down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the operation mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route. Since the opening/closing plate operates (closes), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading toward the grand prize opening, and there is room for improvement from the perspective of drawing attention to the behavior of the ball that enters the grand prize opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the manner in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by the operation manner of the ball entry switching means while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the ball entrance opening. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the ball reaches the profit switching means.

A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the gaming machine H1 is configured to be able to guide a number of balls related to the time at which the ball entry switching means is switched to the second state to the profit switching means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the player can determine in what manner the ball will be guided to the profit switching means based on the length of time the ball entry switching means is maintained in the second state. Since it is possible to make predictions regarding the operation of the ball entry switching means, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the ball entry switching means.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a starting state is formed in which throwing a ball to the profit switching means is started while the ball input switching means is being switched from the first state to the second state. Game machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the ball is thrown to the profit switching means for the first time in the starting state, and the operation of the ball entering switching means is stopped immediately before the starting state. Since the first state can be set again, it is possible to create a game in which the throwing of the ball to the profit switching means does not necessarily start even if the operation is started from the first state. Thereby, it becomes necessary to directly check whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, and thus it is possible to improve attention to the profit switching means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z2. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine has a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Game machine Z3 is characterized by being a fusion machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member disposed in the jackpot during a jackpot game is set to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter, and to be open for a long time to allow a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching the opening for a short time in which balls are not possible (for example, Patent Document 1 : Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-181572).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that there is a risk that there will be a large difference in the number of payouts during the entire jackpot game.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can satisfactorily equalize the number of payouts throughout the jackpot game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 has a gaming area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that flows down the gaming area passes, and a ball through which the ball flows down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. a ball entry switching means capable of switching between a first state in which a ball can be guided to the ball entry port and a second state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the ball entry port; a detection means for detecting a ball entering a ball, in the case where the ball entering switching means maintains the first state, the ball passes through the ball entry opening during a period in which the first state was previously formed; A number changing means is provided which can change the number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls entered.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the number changing means includes a storage means in which the balls that have passed through the ball entry opening are stored, and a ball that is removed from the storage means when the balls are ejected from the storage means. , an ejection port through which the ball passes, an ejection switching means that can be switched between a first state in which the ball can pass through the ejection port and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the ejection port, and a plurality of the ejection switching means. and an operation mode switching means that can operate in different operation modes and can change the number of balls discharged from the storage means depending on the operation mode of the discharge switching means.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which the number changing means includes interval maintaining means for maintaining the interval at which the balls are discharged from the ejection port.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the number of payouts can be uniformized well.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed favorably by the interval maintaining means.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 110 Main control device (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means)
640 Second ball entrance (part of ball entrance, starting port)
640a Electric accessory (part of ball entry switching means)
1000a 1st specific prize opening (part of ball entrance, 1st ball entrance)
1140 Projection part (part of distance maintaining means, projection part)
1150 Ejection port (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means)
1231 Storage channel (part of the ball entry prevention means, part of the number changing means, part of the ball entry state switching means after driving, accommodation means, discharge path)
1231a Guide surface (part of distance maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of distance maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Projection part (part of distance maintaining means, projection part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening/closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
1310 Plate (lifting means)
1331 Ball entry prevention unit (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 Regulation member (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means)
2251 Second storage channel (part of the ball entry prevention means, part of the number changing means, part of the ball entry state switching means after driving, accommodation means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning hole (part of ball entrance, 2nd ball entrance)
2840 Slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 Additional prize opening (relief entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (rise regulation means)
3250 Fall delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b End face (part of the drop hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit giving means)
4850 Allocating device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit giving means)
5900 Ball exit adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means)
7260 Second fall delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)

Claims (3)

A game area through which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball that has flown down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A gaming machine comprising: a ball entry switching means that can switch between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry port; and a detection means that detects entry of the ball into the ball entry port. ,
When the ball entry switching means maintains the first state, the number of balls that can pass through the ball entry port in relation to the number of balls that passed through the ball entry port during the period in which the first state was previously formed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number of pieces. The number changing means includes a storage means for storing the balls that have passed through the ball entry port;
an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the storage means;
a discharge switching means that can be switched between a first state in which a ball can pass through the discharge port and a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port;
and an operation mode switching means that enables the ejection switching means to operate in a plurality of types of operation modes, and allows the number of balls to be ejected from the accommodation means to be changed depending on the operation mode of the ejection switching means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that: 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the number changing means includes interval maintaining means for maintaining an interval at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port.

Images